JP6877849B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a decorated sticker is attached to the front of a member that is visible from the front on a game board that has a game area in which a game is played by a game medium. As a result, the game machines are differentiated from other game machines and the appearance of the game machines is improved .

As this type of gaming machine, a machine has been proposed in which a through hole is formed in a portion where a seal is attached and a rod-shaped member is passed through the through hole to press the seal from the rear and make it easy to peel off (for example, a patent). Document 1). As a result, it is possible to easily perform the work of peeling off the sticker that failed to be stuck at the time of manufacturing, the work of replacing the sticker when changing the model, and the like.
However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the hole for peeling the seal penetrates to the rear side of the game board, a linear tool such as a piano wire can be passed through the hole to the passage of the game medium. There is a problem that it becomes possible to reach a signal line or the like, and fraudulent acts are likely to occur.

Japanese Patent No. 6368327

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a fraud can you to prevent gaming machine in a new manner.

To solve the above problems
"A front member having a decorative body having a predetermined decoration, a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a through hole penetrating the decorated portion back and forth. A passage member provided on the back surface side of the decorated portion and having a passage portion through which a game ball can flow, and the front member is the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached. The portion is formed slightly lower than the surroundings, and further has a rear extending portion extending rearward, the decorated portion has a substantially thin plate shape, and the through hole is the rear extending portion. The passage member penetrates the decorated portion, which is a portion different from the above and has the substantially thin plate shape of the front member , and the passage member is the through hole on the front side of the extension end of the rear extension portion. The gaming machine is provided so as to cover the hole portion of the machine, and is in contact with the back surface side of the decorated portion having a substantially thin plate shape. ”

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts in a new manner.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). (C) is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and looked at from the back. It is sectional drawing cut along the E line in FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing which cut | cut by the aer line in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the part of the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part by cutting the same part as (a) in the conventional door frame. It is sectional drawing which shows. It is a top view which shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end, and (b) is the effect operation unit from the state of (a). It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which is moved to the ascending position. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operating unit in a state where the effect operating unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the moving end. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of the effect operation unit unit which shows the example which provided a plurality of contact detectors in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detectors in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect operation unit which allows the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detection body on the front side and the rear side of the above. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front. (D) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AE. FIG. 66 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line. (A) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and (b) is the right side view of the door frame right side unit. It is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in this state. It is a front view which shows each decorative substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decorative substrate of the part of the effect operation unit of a door frame. It is a rear view which shows each decorative substrate provided around the door window of a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100A viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a perspective view which enlarges and shows the part of the tank rail when the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail of another embodiment is seen from the rear. (A) is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is (c). It is a perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107A is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in the cross section. (A) is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. It is a seen perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111A disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 11 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) as viewed from behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the key line in FIG. 111 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku Ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut by the cake line. FIG. 11 is a bottom view showing a portion rearward of the door frame in the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 111A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guide piece in the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. It is a perspective view. (A) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. (A) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the coco line in (a). It is a sectional view. It is sectional drawing which cut at the sea line in FIG. 121 (a). It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit of FIG. 119 and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elimination of the ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prevention of the invasion of a linear fraudulent tool in the board unit of FIG. 119. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. It is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 129 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 129 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line of the source in (a), and (c) is (a). It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front by disassembling each of the main members. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and (b) is the portion of the separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. It is a side sectional view seen from the right side cut to the left and right with. (A) is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and (c) is a disassembled gate member viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. (A) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the 1st attacker unit and the 2nd attacker unit in FIG. 144. It is a front view of the game board which shows the arrangement of a magnetic sensor. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor capable of detecting the magnetic field line from the magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor unable to detect the magnetic field line from the magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the detection range by a magnetic sensor by the perspective view, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body which cannot detect the magnetic field line from a magnet, (e). Is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is a holding. It is an exploded view which shows the member in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the back front production unit in the back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front effect unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and (c) is (a). It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in). It is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decoration unit of the back front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. The back front left decorative unit is disassembled, and only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base are viewed from behind in an exploded perspective view. is there. (A) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a transparent state. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in the state, and (c) is the front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front effect unit and the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for light-emitting decoration of the back front left decoration unit, and (b) is a guide in the back front effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light plate and the decorative substrate for making the decorative body of the back front lower production unit light-emitting decoration from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which made the back front left decoration unit light-emitting decoration. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting structure of the 2nd picture of a light guide plate. It is a front view of the back front effect unit which shows the state which the 2nd picture of a light guide plate is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved to the descending position with the back rear upper first decorative part of the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper production unit of the back unit facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the back rear upper upper second decorative part is facing forward in the state which the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper production unit of a back unit is moved to a descending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back rear left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower production unit of the back unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back front lower middle decoration body in the back front lower middle production unit of the back front production unit of the back unit in a raised state. The state in which the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit are illuminated and decorated. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 1st picture of the light guide plate in the back front production unit of a back unit is light-emitting decoration. A game in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is luminescent and decorated, and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear lower effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of a board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 2nd picture of the light guide plate in the back front production unit of a back unit in a state which is light-emitting decoration. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) shows a part of the game board of the second embodiment enlarged at the same part as (a). It is a front view. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit is light-emitting decorated in (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 171 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is light-emittingly decorated. It is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate and the cell in the game board of the third embodiment disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a), and (c) is a front view of the function display unit of (a). (D) is a perspective view of the function display unit (a) viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the function display unit of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the function display unit of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 174 and a player. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the function display unit of 3rd Embodiment and a player. It is sectional drawing of the function display unit of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting of a magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing mounting of a magnetic sensor of (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is of (b). It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment of a magnetic sensor by disassembly, and (d) is the exploded perspective view of the attachment of a magnetic sensor which shows by the holding member different from (c). (A) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the positioning hole for the second member in a cross section, and (b) is the first for removing the decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the closed space is formed by the 2nd member behind the separation hole of 1 member in the cross section, (c) is the state which the decorative body of a different thickness is attached in (b) is a cross section. (D) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the mounting hole of the decorative body in cross section. (A) is an explanatory view showing the decorative body attached to the first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is attached a decorative body different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st member from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, and (c) is an explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with the decorative body and a 1st member provided symmetrically, and (d) is the explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with a decorative body and a 1st member provided symmetrically with a shape different from (c). is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the starter line in (a), and (c) is (a). ) And (c) are explanatory views showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member, and (d) shows the relationship between the decorative body having a different form from that of (a) and the movable first member from the front. It is explanatory drawing, and (e) is the cross-sectional view cut along the cheat line in (d).

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A hinge member 510 on the main body frame and a hinge assembly 520 on the lower side of the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. Attached to the front of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. (For example, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 195.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the back front effect unit 3100 and the back rear. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect or a movable effect by the upper effect unit 3200, the back rear lower effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b from the rear side to the right. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. From the horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 (curtain plate internal space 40a) and the outside to be ventilated through a gap between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through a gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the curtain plate internal space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 is caused by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b, and the handle cover unit 290 is obliquely upward and forward. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed through the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device of the game ball B), the main body frame. By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 is discharged forward. Therefore, it is also released from the port member 47 to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players migrating in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be heard, and the player's attention can be attracted by the directing sound, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a deeper bass effect sound, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 195 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200. The door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit. It includes a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the back surface of the door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, the rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by a player. The handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 to launch a game ball B in the upper plate 201. This is for playing a game of driving into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area 5a of the above is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. ..

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front view and inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, and the handle mounting. Cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, and the left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing forward the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, which penetrate the front and rear of the ball feeding unit 140.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 82). And a part of (see FIG. 83) are connected.

The outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the portion extending vertically is formed. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and a door frame left side lower decorative board of the door frame left side unit 420. 423, the door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decorative board 432, door frame right side lower decorative board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 g. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 makes the door frame 3 hingeable with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. Can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear front, and FIG. 34 (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the front, and FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. 36 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock, and (c) is the explanatory view of the cylinder lock which shows the state which was rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. The second cam member 135, which is rotatably attached around the axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A strip-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached and the lower end side is rotatably attached to a portion to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is rotation of the first cam member 134. It is provided with a strip-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135 on the lower end side. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). The rear cover 138 attached to the 115 and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. It is equipped with 139 and.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear surface side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front surface side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably attached to the rear side sandwiching the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side of the second cam member 135, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side in front of the first arm 136.

In the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated from each other at an angle of 90 degrees about their respective rotation axes. doing. Further, each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is provided at a position where the first arm 136 is attached at a position farther from the rotation center than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached. ..

The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end side is not shown in a state in which a shaft portion 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a columnar shape is locked in an L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. Therefore, it is detachably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 are made of metal. ..

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is mounted on the front piece portion. There is. The cylinder lock 130A is provided with a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 of the cylinder lock 130 are centered on rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the right portion, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the portions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 will rotate the second cam member 135 in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, in the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted via the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. It rotates in the direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by rotating the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the first cam member. It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 acts upward. The power to do becomes greater.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes larger than that on the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (b)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is applied. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, and the second arm 137 attached to the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. In contrast to the large force acting on the second arm 137, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is almost no force to rotate in the direction of.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 moves in the clockwise direction. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. Is proportional to the distance between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes smaller. In the arm 137, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 becomes large.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force is increased, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 36 (c)).

When the key is used to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is the opposite of the above. Will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 so as to be in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in any rotation position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected by The second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked well.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to an arbitrary position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the door.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who knows the configuration inserts a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, there is a risk of opening the door frame 3 and performing an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and a fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like. Can be prevented from being done.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 apart from each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees with respect to the first arm 136. A straight line in which a portion attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, when either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is located at the dead point of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so that the first cam member 134 can be transmitted. There is no great resistance to rotation, the key inserted in the key hole 132 can be rotated smoothly, unlocking and locking can be done easily, and the key inserted in the key hole can be forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being damaged and prevent the key from being damaged.

Further, since the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position by the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, for some reason. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the other arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Further, the smooth rod-shaped (strip plate-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at the eccentric position. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, the gear may rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a smooth rod shape, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are moved. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and reliably prevents the lock unit 650 from being illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , Not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt. , Etc. may be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a rotating rod 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37 (a)). The operating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 169) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if it is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by a spring via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is formed by the partition portion 143a. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the fraudulent game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E in FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 in which the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are omitted.

The handle unit 180 of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be operated by the player. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later, and to the front end of the handle base 181. A disc-shaped handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disk-shaped handle base 181 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. The cover pedestal 183, the handle decorative board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and the handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative board 184. It is equipped with a front lens 185.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291 which will be described later. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the ridges 291d are inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. Is inserted so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b extending outward radially at intervals in the circumferential direction from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a in a state where the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend from a portion having an angle of 120 degrees in each counterclockwise direction. The three spoke portions 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c.

The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 can be detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven even by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat plate-shaped mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center side. There is. The three handle guides 196 are mounted on the rear side of the spokes 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting the guide piece 291 g of the handle cover base 291 described later into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, and the rotation angle of the handle 195 is restricted. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two in the upper left of the outer circumference, two in the upper right of the outer circumference, and two in the lower part of the outer circumference. (See FIG. 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decorative substrate 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for each set so that each LED 184a can emit light in full color. I am trying to do it.

Although not shown, the handle decorative board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. .. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decorative board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. The 10 LEDs 184a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 has the LED driver 184b, the number of light emission of the LEDs 184a is larger than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected individually (here, the set). Since it can be controlled every), the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electrical wiring can be simplified.

The front surface of the steering wheel front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The steering wheel front lens 185 is light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting on the player and makes contact with the handle 195 of the player. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the drive of the launch solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be temporarily stopped. By releasing the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative board 293 which is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface. It includes an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has a rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 has a tubular front tubular portion 291a that has substantially the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and extends forward and backward, and the inner diameter decreases from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a toward the front. 291b, a tubular rear cylinder portion 291c that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to penetrate through the middle wall portion 291b, and the inner circumference of the rear cylinder portion 291c. It is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) ridges 291d which are projected inward and extend back and forth in the circumferential direction and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward from the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a, and the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e. At the portion between the cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f protruding forward and the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, the guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front cylinder portion 291a and the front cylinder. It is provided with an opening 291h penetrating in the lower part of the portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape whose cross section bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 and can be inserted into the groove portion 181c to make the handle base 181 relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange portion 291e in the radial direction. The handle cover base 291 is provided with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g projects from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291 g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. A U-shaped guide portion is formed by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide pieces 291 g and rotating the handle 195 through the guide pieces 291 g. The guide piece 291g can be positioned in the 196a to restrict the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e, and has a size in a range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and penetrates the front cylinder portion 291a. ..

The inner 292 has an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and the inner portion 292 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are notched from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is located behind the flange portion 291e into which the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape so as to bulge outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notch 292c is provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 from the center on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and control 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems of 3 systems for each set so that they can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground wire) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Then, in the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative board 293, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b is divided into 6 groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a and a front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292. It has a tubular side plate portion 294b having a short outer peripheral edge extending rearward. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having an inner diameter of the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is a spindle type (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , Etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b notched from the rear end to the front are provided in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the plurality of notch openings 295b are formed so as to coincide with the notch 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , Circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 with the handle 195 in the handle unit 180. A portion on the rear side of the steering wheel is inserted, and a steering wheel 195, a front lens of the steering wheel 185, and the like are located on the front side of the steering wheel cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101. It is attached to 101b.

In the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, the central hub portion 195a at the center is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) at the rear end side of the guide portion 196a between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), And it is rotatably supported in a state where movement in the front-back direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195, the handle cover base 291 and the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed so as to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to being able to illuminate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be luminescently decorated.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that coincide with each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, the handle cover base 291 is provided on both the left and right sides and the lower side when viewed from the outside. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. As a result, the player is relieved of the mental anxiety of thrusting a hand (finger) into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer ring portion 195c. Can be done.

The notch opening 295b on the upper side of the handle cover 295 (the notch 292c on the upper side of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

Further, when a liquid or a game ball B enters the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, the lower side passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292. It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are assembled under the outer frame of the outer frame 2. It is provided on an extension line in the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player thrusts his / her finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for driving the game ball B), the main body frame speaker. By vibrating the 622 and sending the wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the notch opening 295b on the right side can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 or the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B Can be typed in.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily positioned by hooking a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant strength without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, since the game ball B can be driven by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the driving operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle cover base 291 is used. The handle unit 180 attached via the handle unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is visibly closed from the front. In the lower right corner of the door frame 3, a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially protruding from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the handle 195 having the ring portion 195c and the tubular handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c are provided, the handle in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, can be seen in the area where they are, which can have a strong impact on the player and strongly attract the player's attention. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is wandering in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be used.

Further, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can insert the player's finger into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291). When the handle 195 is operated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the operation of the handle 195 can be given to the player a feeling different from that of the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained by the new sense of driving the game ball B. Can be suppressed.

Then, when the player is operating the handle 195, when the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker is caused by the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622. The air inside the enclosure 624 by the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 is sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transferred to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. A sound pressure stimulus can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the fingers of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , You can surprise the player, foresee the arrival of a chance, change the amount of operation of the steering wheel, entertain the player, and make it harder for the player to get bored. , It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover. By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, it is possible to alleviate the stress on the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. it can.

Further, as described above, with respect to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 and the handle 195 The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 provided with the handle cover unit 290 is applied to the grill member 46. Since the stimulus is given by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc. are not damaged, and the handle unit 180 can be made less likely to be damaged. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant sensation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 looks like a steering wheel of an automobile. Therefore, the handle of a conventional pachinko machine Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, and the pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play without hesitation. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are formed in a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the lower part of the handle cover unit 290 is lower than the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it becomes visible and a feeling of openness can be given to the tubular handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting a finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player can be seen. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h that penetrate the handle cover unit 290 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 so as to face downward, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 is provided with the central hub portion 195a, the spoke portions 195b, and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c has a plurality of front ends. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be gripped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated only with a finger, and the outer ring. The steering wheel of an automobile is operated by the portion 195c, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b are gripped by a finger, and the steering wheel cover unit is straddled over the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing operations such as picking the inside and outside of the 290 with a finger, and capable of driving various game balls B (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, and the like, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 may be gripped by a finger, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be pinched by the fingers so as to straddle the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, it becomes possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operation as the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform the handle operation that cannot be achieved by the conventional pachinko machine, so that it is possible to provide the player with various handle operations. , It is possible to entertain the steering wheel operation and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is in a form extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit. The appearance of the 290 as being integrated with the handle 195 can be made, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and the handle cover unit 290. By suppressing the pressing of the game area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from becoming narrower, and the game area 5a can be made relatively large. The large gaming area 5a makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, by appropriately emitting light of the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be light-emitting and decorated. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are made to stand out. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of the player.

Further, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided in a portion of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the door frame look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and the flange portion 291e and the flange portion 291e that restrict the movement in the front-rear direction. The guide piece 291 g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c to the front can be restricted by the guide piece 291 g or the like. The 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be driven by operating the handle 195 while touching the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used for various driving operations (handle operation) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being driven in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is mounted on and projects forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) that is mounted to the right of the mounting base, and a ball that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base. The rental operation unit 220, the upper plate ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit. It has.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It is equipped with a plate right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation unit base 315 housed inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation unit base 315. An annular effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A unit relay board unit 330 is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which is designed to project upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with the effect operation unit 301, and the operation unit base 315, so that the effect operation can be performed. It is provided with an effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 that supports the unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down, and a projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. There is.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, its bottom surface is from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact (rolls), the game ball B is brought into contact with the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged in the machine.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the door frame by cutting horizontally at the portion of the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the main part. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50B, the lower plate ball supply port 211j of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 communicating with the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the central axis. Then, the lower plate ball supply port 211j has a tubular shape that extends straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b by the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265. Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a risk that the storage of the game ball B will be concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the game ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower plate 202 blocks the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211j, the game ball B moves from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower plate 202 side. There is a risk that the full tank detection sensor 154 will operate and the lower plate 202 will be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower plate 202. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend diagonally to the left front. More specifically, at least one game ball B can be distributed with a distance between the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it is a distance.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is to the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. I'm moving to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left. With the 202a closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of the game ball B on the right side in the lower plate 202. Then, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower plate 202 (front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball is supplied. Since the side wall on the left side of the mouth 211c extends diagonally to form a gap through which the game ball B can flow from the rear end of the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B discharged from the unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower plate ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower plate 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. The game ball B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating to notify the full tank even though a sufficient area for storing the game ball B remains in the lower plate 202.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Further, the plate base unit 210 is a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-pulling unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the pre-pulling unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be operated by operating the upper plate ball ejection port 222, the upper plate ball feeding port, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper plate. After the ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is inside the upper plate 201. The game ball B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. Is for. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing a portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the rented game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the card, adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and so on.

The ball lending operation unit 220 is provided on a base portion 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the upper plate ball lending button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display unit 226 located below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 outside the base unit 221. It includes a volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball type LED, and can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the loaned game ball B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 sets the volume of the sound for directing the music, sound, sound effect, etc. output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a pattern that makes the sound come from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is pressed, the volume is increased, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume is decreased.

The light amount adjusting button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and between the two circles. The part of is decorated with a light bulb pattern. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes dark when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player cannot make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect that requires the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. Occasionally, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the loudness of the volume and the brightness of the amount of light are changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted by operating the volume control button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time by simplifying the above.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 49. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 This is for discharging B to the lower plate 202.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is slidably attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 and the rear base 241 which are attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear. The upper plate ball removal slider 242, a spring for urging the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward (not shown), and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball, which protrudes upward from the part where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward. A ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feeding taxiway 241b. It is provided with a ball pull-out taxiway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides the game ball B to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210. It is formed at the position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuating receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface to the rear side of the actuating receiving portion. It is provided with a protruding operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball pulling portion is pulled out on the upper surface of the operating receiving portion. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 passes through the actuating receiving portion of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is located at the upward moving end. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the advance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 in contact can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves to the entrance 141a and the ball pulling. Retreat from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring, the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission unit 242b. The ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side or discharged to the lower plate 202 side by the upper plate ball removal unit 240 via the ball feeding unit 140. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A dish left decoration unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulging portions 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, although not shown, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a centered in the left-right direction, and includes an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. .. The effect operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. ..

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 coincides with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b in the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves to open the lower plate ball removal hole 202a, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is passed through the lower plate 202. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200.

When the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Then, the game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and then release the pressure to release the lower plate ball removal lid 265. Returns to the normal state position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The dish left decoration unit 270 and the dish right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish left decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish left decoration that penetrates the dish left decoration 271. It includes a lens 272 and a dish left decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the dish left decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The dish left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction in a state of being aligned with the front surface of the dish left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the dish left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the left side unit 420 of the door frame in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. Since the dish left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish right decoration that penetrates the dish right decoration 276 and has translucency. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

The dish right decoration body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish right ornament 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The dish right decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction so as to coincide with the front surface of the dish right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and the dish right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The plate right decoration unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3 and its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. , A step can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish left decorative unit 270 and the dish right decorative unit 275 side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front with the effect operation button directed upward, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front lower side. is there. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the upward moving end. It is sectional drawing of the effect operation unit in the state which the part unit moved to an ascending position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the position of the downward moving end.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a contact operation and a press operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a press operation, and accepts the player's operation and moves the effect operation unit 301. It can be (vibrated) so that the player can participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the production during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303. In the effect operation unit 301, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are formed in a circular shape having a diameter of about 5/8 with respect to the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided on the front surface in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and has a spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310 and an effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the outside on the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. The operation unit base 315 to be attached and the effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). The outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit from above, and the operation unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 adjusts the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projecting output of the effect operation unit 350. It is provided with a sudden output adjusting mechanism 380. The effect operation unit unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (around the effect operation unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is an annular shape having a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward and an insertion port 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 through which the effect operation unit 301 is inserted. It is provided with a unit top cover 312. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and the lower side of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. That is, the outer surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed to have a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the present embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 has translucency, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is connected so that the plate left decorative body 271 and the plate right decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit base 315 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper plate main body 212 on the plate base unit 210 on the rear side. The front and lower parts of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311 and the upper part is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body portion 315a having an open upper portion, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body portion and having a circular outer circumference. ing. The effect operation unit 350 is housed inside the main body 315a. Further, the main body 315a has a pair of guide shafts 362 and a lower end of the central shaft 366 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to the bottom wall. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located on substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 covers the substrate base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 331, and the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333, which is attached to the board base 331 as described above, is provided.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes an effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 (front decorative substrate 321 and rear decorative substrate 322), a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative substrate 364, and an operation button. The connection between the elevating drive motor 367, the push detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, the protrusion output detection sensor 375, and the protrusion output adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is relayed.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303. Is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351 and a button body 351 from below. The cylindrical button sleeve 353 that is inserted, the disk-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and is supported by the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, and is arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface thereof.

Further, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 in which the vibration motor 356 is attached to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detector 352. It is provided with a contact detection sensor main body 358 that is connected and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 is composed of a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved so as to bulge upward, a tubular tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. It has a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape forming a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The upper surface portion 351a is provided with a circular decoration formed to a diameter of about 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of the present embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference, and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side having a certain width from the outer circumference bulges upward. The contact detector 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 and bulges diagonally upward, and the inside thereof is formed flat. As a result, the contact detector 352 looks like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends of the outer peripheral edge and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. In the contact detector 352, the capacitance with respect to the entire area is suppressed by the plurality of holes of the punching metal, and erroneous detection is prevented. Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is good. It can be luminescent and decorated in a state of being.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detector 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, and detects contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the button main body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a tubular sleeve body 353a extending vertically and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 and the length is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disk shape having substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a penetrating vertically at a portion symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b penetrating vertically at the center, and projecting from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. It is provided with a pair of guide pins 354c and the like. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The central hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 354d detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are in contact with the lower surface of the button base 354, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365.

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the button outer decorative substrate 355. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on the double circumference of concentric circles. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button main body 351 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operating unit 301. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation unit 301 (effect operation unit unit 350) in the vertical direction. As a result, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. Further, the influence of the vibration by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, and the like, an output circuit, and the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detector 352. That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance is exceeded. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a signal having a plurality of stages may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detector 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. Further, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body is in a state where the effect operation unit 350 is projected upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the 351. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as the contact operation unit 302 by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like a sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state), the effect operation unit 350 does not move further downward even when pressed, and the pressing operation cannot be performed. .. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated from the press detection sensor 373 and becomes a non-detection state. .. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressure. It is detected by the sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button body 351, it touches the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 when operating the contact operation unit 302. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having irregularities due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, fine irregularities and a plurality of streaks are formed on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 to give an arbitrary tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

In the above description, the button body 351 is made transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. As a result, the contact detector 352 made of punching metal becomes difficult to see through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that the button body 351 has translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be light-lit and decorated by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can emit light by the light emitting effect of the button body 351. Can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit elevating mechanism]
The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can elevate the effect operation unit unit 350. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit unit 350, and has a substantially circular elevating mechanism base 361 and a central axis of the elevating mechanism base 361. A pair of cylindrical columns that are symmetrically arranged and have the lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation base 315 and the upper end penetrating the operation base 315 and the button base 354 and extending upward. The guide shaft 362 and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other, and the outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353. It includes a decorative substrate 364 in a button on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

Further, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively, and a pair of elevating springs 365 for urging the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. It includes a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, which is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotation shaft projects upward, and the rotation shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. The spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368, which is engaged with the elevating drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, is rotated by the spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 and the driven gear 369. The elevating cam drive gear member 370, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, is provided.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted and the lower end is connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the elevating cam that elevates and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. It includes a member 371 and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the pressing detection sensor 373 for detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. An elevating detection sensor 374 that detects the elevating and lowering of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating spring lower holding member of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. It is provided with a sudden output detection sensor 375 that detects the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the ascending / descending of the 385.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes an elevating spring together with a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 penetrating the base body 361a. It is provided with a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 315a of the operation portion base 315. A driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a sudden output detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, an elevating detection sensor 374, and a bump output adjusting drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the elevating mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space in which the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 penetrate the pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. .. The central shaft 366 penetrates the center of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The lower end of each of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315, and the upper end of each is attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower projecting portion into contact with the upper projecting portion of the gear cover 372. it can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the decorative substrate 364 in the button are full-color LEDs. The decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and guide shafts 362 are inserted in each of the pair of elevating springs 365. The lower end of the pair of elevating springs 365 is in contact with the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the upper end is in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 55 and the like). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view of the elevating cam member 371. Is formed in. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 is urged upward by the elevating spring 365 (effect operation unit unit 350). Can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the elevating spring 365 and the elevating cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion portion protruding upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion portion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projecting portion into contact with the lower end of the lower projecting portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operating unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operating unit 350. The pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the state where the effect operation unit 350 is moved to the most downward position (normal state). When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 lowers the effect detection sensor 373 to the lower moving end against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button base 354 354d of the detection piece can be detected, and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) can be detected.

The elevating detection sensor 374 detects the elevating detection piece 370c of the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and thereby means the elevating cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370. The rotation position of is detected.

The sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the unexpected output adjusting mechanism 380.

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the effect operation unit 350 so as to be able to move up and down via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front and rear, and the button base 354 is supported by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation unit 350 can be urged upward through the method. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevating cam member 371 by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Can be made to. Further, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the decorative substrate 364 in the button.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55 (a)). See). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is located at the downward moving end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Further, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 are in agreement with each other, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 And the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in a normal state (the effect operation unit 350 is in the descending position), it meshes with the elevating drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 55A moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked. The button base 354 rolls from the 371c to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Then, when the guide pin 354c that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 354c and the guide pin 354c At the same time, the button base 354 is raised, and the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the elevating output adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381, although details will be described later. it can. Then, since the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 can be changed according to the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the effect operating unit 350 is raised by the protruding output according to the compression amount of the elevating spring 365. It can be projected to a position.

In the state where the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is the third of the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the movement of the button base 354 further upward is restricted. Further, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moving upward, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. Also protrudes upward.

In this raised position, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the effect operation unit 350 pushes the elevating spring 365. The button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 as it moves downward against the urging force of the. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is in a state of being detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 of the effect operation unit unit ( The pressing of the pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

To return the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so that the guide pin 354c is moved by the third cam 371e. Is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation unit 350 to the descending position, the projecting output adjusting drive motor 381 of the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 moved the elevating unsprung holding member 385 downward to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. The state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward becomes weak, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It becomes weaker, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 that rotates the elevating cam member 371 can be reduced, and damage (failure) of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced. Further, as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor having a low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the original descending position.

In the above, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, so that the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( An example of moving the button base 354 (button body 351) from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and projecting the button base 354 (button body 351) from the descending position to the ascending position at once has been described. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is locked to the locking portion 371c of 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the lower position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 makes the elevating cam member 371 watch in a plan view. It may be rotated in the clockwise direction. Incidentally, the elevating distance of the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in the present embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c is moved by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to the third cam 371e. Will move upward along. When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e and the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 is projected upward at an arbitrary position between the descending position and the ascending position. It can be stopped. Then, by projecting the button body 351 to a position higher than the lowering position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the button body 351 is pressed by the pressing operation unit 303. Can function as.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365. Is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 (operation button elevating drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operation feeling of the pressing operation of the button main body 351 can be lightened.

In this way, since the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, the protrusion amount can be changed according to the gaming state (for example, the first start port 2002 or the like. By making the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 different (depending on the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004), the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

It should be noted that at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be locked may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. As a result, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same protrusion amount, and the variation in the protrusion amount can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, so that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 stops the rotation of the elevating cam member 371. It is not necessary to continue, and the load applied to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Sudden output adjustment mechanism]
The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, so that the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward (the momentum (pressing operation unit 303)). The sudden output) can be changed. The protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361.

The sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 includes a sudden output adjusting drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. From the transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, the spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384 that has a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a columnar shape and has a spiral groove formed on the outer circumference, and is rotatably supported by inserting a central shaft 366, and an adjusting screw. It includes a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the 384, penetrates the pair of guide shafts 362, and is in contact with the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365.

The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the bump output adjustment drive motor 381 and the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The sudden output adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft protruding from the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The upper and lower adjustment screws 384 are formed to have a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending back and forth, a screw hole 385b penetrating up and down at the center of the main body portion 385a and screwing with the screw portion 384b, and front and rear of the main body portion 385a. It has a spring holding recess 385c that is provided at both ends and is recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the elevating spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body 385a. .. The elevating unsprung holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 penetrating the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion adjustment drive motor 381, the protrusion adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380 moves the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b meshing with the screw portion 384b by rotating the adjusting screw 384 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381. be able to.

In the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, when the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is large. Become. On the other hand, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved downward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 becomes small (FIG. 56). reference). That is, when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be increased, and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Then, the urging force for urging the effect operating unit 350 upward by the elevating spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion output upward of the effect operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion output detection sensor 375 when the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is raised most. That is, when the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is the largest, the detection piece 385d is detected by the sudden output detection sensor 375. As a result, when the sudden output detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the sudden output adjusting drive motor 381, the elevating unsprung holding member 381 by the protruding output adjusting drive motor 381 By stopping the upward movement of the 385, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from being further compressed, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 from being damaged.

Further, as described above, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion output of the effect operation unit 350, so that the button body is operated by the contact detector 352 while the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position. The contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, the player's finger, etc.) to the 351 is detected, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 projects the effect operation unit 350 to bring it into contact with the object to be detected. Occasionally, the position of the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction may be appropriately selected so that the protruding output of the button body 351 is different. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be made different. Therefore, if the button body 351 strongly abuts, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the sudden output adjusting mechanism 380, the button is selected according to the gaming state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004). By increasing or decreasing the sudden output of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the urging force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the urging force by applying a twist to the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to project the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the urging force, it is impossible to use it differently from the original use. Stress acts on the compression coil spring, and the internal structure may deteriorate and be damaged at an early stage. On the other hand, in the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the projecting output of the effect operating unit 350 is changed by changing the compression amount of the elevating spring 365 by moving the elevating unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the elevating spring 365, and it is possible to reduce the early deterioration of the elevating spring 365. It can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate, the button outer decorative substrate, and the button inner decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58B is a front view of the dish unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand or the like, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can perform a pressing operation. The contact operation unit 302 is provided above the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the dish unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 is the effect. It coincides with the spherical surface of the operation unit cover unit 310. Further, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical decorative body and can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit unit 350). An annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is arranged inside the pressing operation unit 303 near the outer edge, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is further arranged inside the annular button outer decorative substrate 355. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, centering on the button inner decorative board 364. The LED 355a inside the decorative substrate 364 inside the button and the decorative substrate 355 outside the button is arranged below the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal to provide translucency. Since it has, the light from them can be satisfactorily transmitted upward (player side).

The effect operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 by the LED 320a of the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320. Further, the LED 355a of the button outer decorative substrate 355 can illuminate and decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button are arranged in a row on the circumference, in the circumferential direction. By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect that the light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside and the light from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303 are emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) has its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58 (a). It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is impossible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation according to the player participation type effect to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the process proceeds to the next production stage. When the contact is detected, the button body 351 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of the LED 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the button inner decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the contact operation is accepted by the player. It may be possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, such as a "big hit" game) is given to the player by the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the button body 351 may be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 356. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation unit 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, by giving a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to the vibration motor 356, the player may be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game. good.

Further, as an effect in a normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a sound, a sound effect, or the like is output. After that, when the contact detector 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with respect to the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) up and down. It is projected upward (pop-up) by the urging force of the spring 365. More specifically, in a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the cam portion 371a (first cam). Departing from 371b), the effecting operation unit 350 (button body 351 and pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrudes upward together with the button base 354 by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 (FIG. 371b). 55 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. Then, as the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised. It can be of great interest.

After that, the process shifts to the effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) to entertain the player with the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is pressed. Moving downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the effect can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger to entertain the player with the player participation type effect.

In addition, at the time of the above-mentioned production, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion output (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the player can determine the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion output. May suggest to. Further, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed.

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like approach the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is displayed. The main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like to give an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 may increase or decrease the protrusion output of the button body 351 so that the player can suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the protrusion output.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detector 352 causes the player's fingers and the like to be outside the projecting range of the button body 351 protruding upward and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the button body is approaching. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the fingers and the like of the player, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 makes the protrusion output of the button body 351 stronger or weaker, and makes the player suggest the degree of expectation for the game by the strength of the wind pressure that hits the player's fingers or the like. You may do so.

Further, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers or the like by the contact detector 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is projected with a strong projectile output by the projecting output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously to generate a sound (protruding sound), which surprises the player with the projecting sound. Can be done. Further, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak protrusion by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351. The button body 351 protrudes before you know it, which can surprise the player.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is generally used by weakening the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380. It is also possible to perform an effect that causes the same pressing operation as the pressing button. Alternatively, the thrust output adjusting mechanism 380 may be used to increase the urging force of the elevating spring 365 to cause the player to perform an effect of pressing the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as the effect after the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, an effect such that the protruding button body 351 is touched may be executed. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button main body 351 may be contact-operated. Further, at this time, it is desirable to strengthen the urging force of the elevating spring 365 by the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, whereby the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation). The contact operation of the unit 302) can be easily performed.

As an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button base 354 is described above by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360. The guide pin 354c of the above is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the descending position to the ascending position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 and the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) is moved to the descending position, the operation button elevates and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is in the middle of the third cam 371e. The rotation of the button body 351 may be stopped to stop the upward protrusion of the button body 351 at a position between the descending position and the ascending position. At this time, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the urging force of the elevating spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is projected halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed and the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production. In this case, since the amount of protrusion upward of the button body 351 can be made different according to the rotation position of the elevating cam member 371, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , Can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the elevating spring 365. To the minimum state. As a result, since the urging force of the elevating spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is enhanced to perform the pressing operation. Can be entertained. Further, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is set to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365. May be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be forced to push the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more versatile. It is possible to present the production, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detector is provided so that the contact of the player's fingers or the like with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected in a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). A plurality of steps of threshold values may be set according to the capacitance of 352, and the effect may be changed according to each step. That is, paying attention to the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. It may be possible to detect in multiple stages and utilize it for the production by providing. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 or the game. By dividing the stage where a person's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and changing the effect according to each stage, a variety of effects can be presented to the player even with one contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is set to the lower position, and the elevating unsprung holding member is set. Although the state in which the 385 is moved upward is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the effect operating unit 350 is set to the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 is moved. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the elevating spring 365 is not strongly compressed under the normal state, it is possible to prevent the elevating spring 365 from deteriorating (fatigue) at an early stage. Further, the strongly compressed urging force of the elevating spring 365 can prevent the button base 354 and the elevating unsprung holding member 385 from being deteriorated (fatigue) at an early stage.

As described above, according to the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for the player participation type effect of various patterns, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects and make the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, in the effect operation unit 300, an annular (combined two arcs) effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is provided on the upper part of the spherical effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative substrate 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operation unit 350, a button interior decorative substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting the capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lower position to the upper position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) is provided. ) Will approach the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode will change due to the approach of the decorative substrate 320 around the effect operation unit and the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and the contact detection sensor There is a risk that the main body 358 will erroneously detect.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) between the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the decorative substrate 364 in the button and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, by moving the effect operation unit 350 up and down, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor body 358 And the shield connected to the ground (GND) where the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 200 of the embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of the effect operation unit unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are connected to one contact detection sensor main body. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the example which provided the switching part between, and (c) is the effect that the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the contact detector on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit and the like. FIG. 61 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detector having decorativeness, and FIG. 61 (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In FIGS. 59 to 61, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. The contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R are connected to each of the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R. According to this embodiment, on the upper surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves the fingers or the like from the left side to the right side, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector left 390L changes and the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes detection, and the capacitance of the contact detector right 390R does not change, and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains undetected. It becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitances of both the contact detector left 390L and the contact detector right 390R change, so that the contact detection sensor body left 391L and the contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body change. Both right 391R are detected. Further, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the contact detector left 390L returns to the original state, the contact detection sensor body left 391L becomes non-detection, and the contact detector right 390R is electrostatically charged. The capacitance is changing and the contact detection sensor body right 391R remains detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers and the like due to the combination of detection / non-detection of the contact detection sensor main body left 391L and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R by the contact detection body left 390L and the contact detection body right 390R and the pattern of the change. Can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a contact operation with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player-participatory effect capable of causing the contact operation unit 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , The player participation type effect of operating the contact operation unit 302 can be further enjoyed. If a contact detector is added, more complicated operations can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60A is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, in a state where a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact with a human body or the like by any of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by arranging a plurality of contact detectors 393 distributed inside (lower side) of the button body 351 so that the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351. The contact detection body 393 can detect the contact, and the accuracy of detecting the contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detectors 393 may cause trouble to a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may be injured or another player). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where a fraudulent act may be performed, etc.), and when a human body or the like is detected by any of the contact detectors 393, cautions, warnings, etc. may be notified.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 60 (b), switching between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which the portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect the contact of the human body or the like only in the desired portion (contact detection body 352). .. The switching unit 394 includes "a switch by a switching circuit using a relay or a transistor", "a switch by another electronic circuit", and "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60 (c)". The unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300) are switched according to the movement of the unit 270).

For example, in the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are distributed and arranged, and a player participation type effect is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Occasionally, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of being touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's fingers or the like have touched. good. As a result, it is possible to present the player with a highly game-like player-participation-type effect by the plurality of contact detectors 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, the first is on the front side of the effect operation unit 300. When the contact detector 393a is provided and the second contact detector 393b is provided on the rear side of the dish left decoration unit 270, the dish right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 to project the effect operation unit 300 and the like forward. When the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394 and the effect operation unit 300 or the like is retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394. You may switch to do so.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects the contact or approach of the player and stops the effect operation unit 300 or the like from moving forward. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressing the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and the effect is performed with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detector 393b so as to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detector 393b detects the player's fingers or the like, the movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like to the rear is stopped, and the fingers or the like are separated from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. The guidance of the above is notified to the player, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved rearward only when the second contact detector 393b is not detected to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap on the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like, and it is possible to enhance the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61A, the outer shape of the contact detector 395 that detects the contact of the player's fingers or the like is shaped like a star to have decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a predetermined item. It may have a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like. As a result, since the contact detector 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detector 352 formed of punching metal is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contact detector can be a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, or the like. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It is desirable that the contact detector is provided on the back surface side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or the like do not come into direct contact with the contact detector, so that the contact detector can be prevented from being worn and the surface member provides a tactile sensation. It can be smooth.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one in which the decorative substrate 364 (LED364a) in the button is provided below the contact detector 352 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the present invention is shown. A contact detector 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below the contact detector 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, so that the decorativeness of the effect operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. it can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61B, the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition so that the decorative body 398 provided below cannot be visually recognized due to the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 under normal conditions. By illuminating the decorative body 398 with an LED provided below the contact detector 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396, the decorative body 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397. good.

Further, the contact detector 352 may be formed so as not to be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detector include "a body formed of a transparent member", "a body formed so as to be integrally visible with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body", and the like. As a result, the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, so that the player does not detect the contact of the fingers or the like or perform the contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation type effect is executed and the player's fingers or the like come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises the button body 351. By projecting to, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detector 352 (contact operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the woo line in FIG. 62 (a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 421. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side base 421 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. It covers the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. The door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 is provided.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and the upper and lower decorative boards 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. It is provided with a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light of the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is outer. By penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71 (a)). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 422a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. LED 422b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs, 4 for the first LED 422a and 8 for the second LED 422b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 422a provided with the second LED 422b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 422b. Further, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. The four first LEDs 422a divided into three sets and the eight second LEDs 422 b divided into three sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 423a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. LED423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 423 below the left side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a total of 18 full-color LEDs, 6 for the first LED 423a and 12 for the second LED 423b, are mounted. Further, the first LED 423a provided with the second LED 423b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Further, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7 to 9 from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets in full color, respectively. As described above, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground wire) that supplies power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. And one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423a divided into four and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The left side upper reflector 424 is formed with a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 424a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later. Is. The holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that penetrates the holding cylinder 424b and protrudes forward, the second of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing the through holes 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, in the reflector 424 on the left side, a mounting hole for mounting on the left side base 421 of the door frame is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 is formed with a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A tubular holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the circumference of the front side of the through hole 425a faces forward. It is formed in a dish shape that spreads out. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and project forward, the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame facing more is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, and the left side of the door frame. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b which has a constant shape recessed in an arc shape and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to avoid a plurality of openings 426a. doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending in the front-rear direction in a columnar shape and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the reflector 424 on the left side from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 427 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a extending in the front and rear in a columnar shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The light guide member 428 on the left side can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower left side light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Formed of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the tip surface is on the left side of the door frame. It is in a state of matching the surface of the side decoration body 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is formed to be the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the handle cover 295. At the same time, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed to be the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward from the portion below the center, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, and the lower end is below the door window 101a. It is located above the speaker port 211b in the above. Further, the upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are located at a position to some extent rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated with the door frame. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided at a position separated from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. Light) can be used to make the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428. The light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LED 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides in an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decoration body 426 from the rear, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 is evenly projected. It can be luminescent and decorated in a planar shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a to each other. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame. The appearance of the side decoration body 426 in the light emitting decoration can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66A is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 66B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and FIG. 66C is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 3D is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 66 (a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side base 431 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals. The door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and the door frame right attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. It includes a side decoration body 435 and.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. It includes a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides the light from the LED 433a forward.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape on the right side of the door frame. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of door frame right side bases 431 that are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the door frame right side base 431, and is provided between the door frame right side right side right side. It comprises a translucent right side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted so as to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440.

The left and right sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend vertically with a substantially constant width. Further, the door frame right side base 431 is curved to the rear side when the rear end side extends vertically over the entire height and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens). At a height portion where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided, there are a plurality of reflector portions 431a that are recessed from the left and right side surface sides and extend forward to the front end. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inside of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface side, and the bottom surface is curved.

Further, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with decorative holes 438a and decorative holes 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion inside the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a. , Penetrating in the left-right direction (recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 transmits light radiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. It reflects in the direction to illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 (see FIG. 70 and the like).

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 432a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. LED432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Further, the first LED 432a provided with the second LED 432b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the third to the sixth to the eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c. In order to make the third LED 432c emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the above 21 systems, the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame will be described later. A total of 24 systems, which are 3 systems for 1 group on the upper side of the 3rd LED 433c divided into 2 groups, are controlled.

Although not shown, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame has a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable composed of one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. In the four first LEDs 432a divided into three, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the groups can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two first LEDs 433a are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. LED433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame at intervals at the top and bottom. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted. Further, the first LED 433a provided with the second LED 433b on both the upper and lower sides is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 433b. Further, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of irradiating light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

In the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to the 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to the 6th from the top, and 7th to the 9th from the top. It is divided into 4 groups: 3 pieces from the top and 3 pieces from the 10th to the 12th pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to make the third LED 433c emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems for each set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c. Of these, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side and the third LED 433c on the rear side). The lower two) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame is provided with power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. Power line (one is the ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of a book clock line and four electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. Each set consists of 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 4 sets, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower set divided into 2 sets. It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame. At the same time, a tubular holding cylinder 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. The circumference of the side is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted. The light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and project forward, the second LED 432b of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides thereof and the like. The light from the second LED 433b of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is irradiated to the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being reflected on the back side of the 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, a mounting hole for mounting on the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a fixed shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid a plurality of openings 435a. doing.

The light guide member 436 on the right side has four light guide shafts 436a extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a. , Formed of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide member 436 on the right side can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right side light guide member 437 has six light guide shafts 437a extending back and forth in a columnar shape and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a. , Formed of transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side. It is in a state of matching the surface of the decorative body 435. The light guide shaft member 437 on the lower right side can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate the light from the tip to the outside. The opening 435a of the decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame can be made to emit bright light.

The left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. The front end side of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The decorative body 438 on the right side and left side of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a is aligned with the outer (left side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 439a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) in the left-right direction. Further, the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors with synthetic resins having different colors and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The two types of resins are molded in two colors, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (FIG. 71 (a)). When molding the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes to the right to the right of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a is aligned with the outer (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 in a state of being fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern formed in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative portion 441a which is light-emitting and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left. It is formed in the same color as the part of the circular or radial pattern on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the right side left side decoration 438 of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the outer portion of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 has a large protrusion from the top to a portion at a height of about half a portion, and forms a tsuitate. As a result, in the island equipment of the game hall, it is difficult for the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side to visually recognize the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed in a tsuitate shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, which makes it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. It is possible to make it difficult for other players to feel as if they are being seen by other players, so that other players can play the game without hesitation.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are located at some positions behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. Because the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is irradiated with the door frame. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescently decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate provided at positions separated from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The light from the first LED 433a of the 433 is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than the other portions.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 emits light of the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, thereby causing the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. It is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 via 431a. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, since a part of the left and right side surfaces (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the right side unit 430 of the counter-shaped door frame can be light-emittingly decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be used for other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to stand out and has a high appeal to the player.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the front side first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. The one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are used to illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. With the third LED 433c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, due to the presence of the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The right side decoration body 438 on the right side of the frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are irradiated to illuminate the decoration, or the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the right side decoration 435 on the front door frame. It is possible to prevent the door from being luminescent and decorated. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435, the rear side door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be completely independent and luminescently decorated. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a light emitting effect having a higher effect to a player.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LED 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides in an equal amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a to each other in the door frame right side decorative body 435. .. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected on the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadows are projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the portion to be used, the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is improved. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See FIG. 72).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451 and a pair of tops provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. The side speaker (not shown), the top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top top cover 452 projects forward in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends to the left and right in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top top cover 452 in a plan view. Further, the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction projects forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are provided apart from each other on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers, and output sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high frequencies of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, and a top side speaker, and a door frame sub of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a portion rearward from the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. Has been done. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28, 71 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is opaque in the door frame, and FIG. Is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a unit top cover 312 and a button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decorative body 453, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the effect operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame. Since the right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, these decorative substrates By appropriately emitting light from the LED, it is possible to decorate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a with light emission, or to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical effect operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is attached to the center in the left-right direction. As a result, in the dish unit 200, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is located at the center, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302 and pressing) of the effect operation unit 300 can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be made to stand out.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation unit 301 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) to be recognized as being operable, and the effect operation unit 300 made of a huge sphere allows the player to see other things at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from the pachinko machine, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to select the machine 1.

Further, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302) And the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire effect of the effect operation unit 301 can be easily seen by the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to strongly make the player want to operate the huge spherical effect operation unit 301, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. At the same time, when the player participation type production is executed, the player can actively operate the production operation unit 301, and the operation of the production operation unit 301 makes the player participation type production entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, the plurality of circular and radial patterns on the outer surface are colored in two colors using two types of synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors with two types of resins, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

For example, demonstrating the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the inner layer 3a is provided with a honeycomb pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the circular pattern portion is inside. The honeycomb-like pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the portion other than the pattern, and the exterior has an appearance in which the circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and is relatively circular. The radial pattern is hard to see. That is, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted in the decorative hole 440a is used as a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthesis). By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, at the time of a minor change or the like, by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in the island equipment to make the player feel colorful. It is possible to increase the appealing power to.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame molded in two colors with the right lens 441 on the right side, but the door is molded in three colors. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the frame and the right lens 441 on the right side may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, those in which a circular or radial pattern is formed are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side provided on the outside of the door window 101a in which the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward. The decorative body such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmission rates, and the decoration with a polka dot pattern is formed by the two color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so that the decorative body has a desired shape like the decorative body of a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to apply the desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the door, and the labor required for the decoration can be omitted and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle are each transmitted. When they are formed in the same color with different rates, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, so that the polka-dotted circles are difficult to see, and the appearance is such that the polka-dotted decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. The polka-dotted circles are clearly visible, giving the appearance a pink background with white polka-dotted decoration. In this way, when the decorative body is formed, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, and the appearance can be changed. The cost can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used when forming the decorative body. If the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row at the island equipment, the island equipment will look colorful. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is wandering in the game hall, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player.

Further, a handle cover 295 and a door frame left side base having a decoration molded in two colors by a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmission rates on a portion outside the door window 101a in which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward. Since decorative bodies such as 421, the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame, and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame are provided, the outside of the door window 101a should be decorated with the decorative body to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the decorative body molded in two colors is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b is transmitted through the light. As a low rate, the inner layer 3a is prevented from being seen through from the outside, and at the time of model change, a synthetic resin having high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decorative body can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Further, as described above, since the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see by the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance, a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc.) on the surface of the inner layer 3a, etc. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and is transparent to the outer layer 3b at the time of model change. Since the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin, the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of model change.

Further, inside the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light Since the third LED 433c of 433 is provided and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmission rate than the others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The part of the layer 3a (the part of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated with light emission, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission to improve the appearance and to the player on the right side of the door frame. The light emitting decoration of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be light-emitting decorated, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be beautifully displayed for the game. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the person.

Further, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances (multicolor). Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are made to emit light depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that can be seen when there is no light and the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit can be made different, and by changing the decoration, the player's interest can be strongly attracted. More specifically, for example, when two-color molding is described as multi-color molding as an example, when a hole having a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is made to emit light. In the absence, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the outer layer 3b is inside. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a can be seen, and the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed on the surface and the portion of the hole can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not emitted can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is luminescently decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green light (or white), both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion on the surface are luminescently decorated. Therefore, the luminescent decoration in the decorative body depends on the color of the light emitted by the LED. The part to be decorated can be changed, and the decoration to be luminescent can be changed. As described above, since the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body causes the player to have a chance or change the driving operation (for example, "right-handed"). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suggested and can produce various effects.

Further, since the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different between the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Since the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front left and the front right can be different, the pachinko machine 1 is wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player once passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance is different from that at the time of the previous round trip, which attracts interest in the pachinko machine 1. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and can attract a player who is wandering in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. ..

[3-10. LED layout and system in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative substrate of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner in the front view, in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by a rotation operation by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b to each other. It has an appearance similar to the steering wheel (steering wheel) of an automobile.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with the handle front lens 185, and a handle decorative substrate 184 on which a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted is provided on the front surface.

There are a total of 10 handle decorative substrates 184, one in the center, three on the middle circumference with a certain interval in the circumferential direction, and six with a certain interval in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric pattern. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by a broken line in FIG. 72, two in the upper left of the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, each connected by a broken line. It is divided into 5 groups, 2 on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five sets are controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and each set of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, 12 LEDs 293a are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 72, are two from the center on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 at the bottom right and 2 at the bottom right. The LEDs 293a divided into these 6 sets are controlled by 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and each set of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195 and toward the center of the handle 195 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emitting effect in which the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195. Further, the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can illuminate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a dish left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish right decorative body 276, a production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

The dish left decorative body 271, the dish right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semi-tube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, the dish left decorative substrate 273 behind the dish left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish right decorative substrate 278 behind the dish right decorative body 276, and the like. Door frame left side decorative board 426 rear door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423, door frame right side decorative body 435 rear door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right The lower side decorative substrate 433, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the dish left decorative substrate 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted in a row in the left-right direction on the front surface, and an LED driver for emitting the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, which will be described later. (The illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 273a divided into these two sets are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The dish right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The LEDs 278a divided into these two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the dish left decorative substrate 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for emitting a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 422b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two sets and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three sets are controlled by the LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and the first LED 422a and the second of each set are controlled. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two mounted vertically side by side between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three sets and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four sets are controlled by the LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LED 423a and the second LED of each set are controlled. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 432a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 432a are placed on the front surface. It includes eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d of the above is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 72. Further, the eight second LEDs 432b are the upper two, the third to the fifth from the top, and the sixth to the eighth from the top, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 3 groups, 3 pieces up to the first piece. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. The first LED 432a divided into two sets, the second LED 432b divided into three sets, the third LED 432c divided into two sets, and the third LED 432c divided into two sets in the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The upper set of the third LED 433c of the LED 433c is controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored. It can emit light in full color.

On the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction and two first LEDs 433a arranged vertically side by side between the first LEDs 433a are placed on the front surface. Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c. It is equipped with an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets in order of two from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. Further, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. It is divided into 4 groups, 3 from the 7th to the 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to the 12th from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. What are the 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 sets, the 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 sets, and the lower 1 set of 2 3rd LEDs 433c divided into 2 sets? , The LED driver 433d controls 24 systems, and each set of the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame are formed in a left-right asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as a boundary. Further, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are also different in shape in the front-rear direction. ..

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on their respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same as each other, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72) (Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the LED lighting pattern for performing the light emission effect.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is equipped with an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three sets of two from the left, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three sets are controlled by nine systems by the LED driver, and each set of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a broken line in FIG. 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the optical member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. It is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that emits bright light in a dot shape, which is a dot shape that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The luminescent effect that shines in the spot can make the player "haha".

Further, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the dish left decorative substrate 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the dish right decorative substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower left side of the door frame The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, the second LED 432b of the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the decorative board 433 below the right side of the door frame, the LED 455a of the central decorative board 455 on the top of the door frame, the left decorative board on the top of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 456a of the 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated, or the light can be emitted so as to move along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Can be shown to the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72 executes a spot emission effect on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission) by the LED system connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Since the light is radiated to the door frame, the portions of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be spot-emitting with high brightness and brightness as compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. .. At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 a. And even if the portion of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-emitting with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the effect image, the decorative body, and the like in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that project forward (the front ends that project forward in an arc shape in a plan view). However, since it is provided on the line in the vertical direction), the spot emission light is not emitted to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot emission light from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, and is behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and the spot light emission with high brightness makes it possible to direct the interest of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, according to the door frame 3, spot light emitting portions are provided on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protruding forward on the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portion is located outside the player, so that the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame emit spot light, high-intensity spot light can be seen from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the existence of this pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine to be played can be selected in the game hall. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.

It should be noted that both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for making the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit spot light. It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the surface LEDs of the above are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided by the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape in which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is provided. The effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit is divided into two, a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative substrate 321 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Six of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative substrate 322 of the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322, 4 are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference at intervals near both ends of the arc, and 3 are provided between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and 6 on the inner circumference are 3 sets of 2 each in the circumferential direction, and 3 on the middle circumference. Is divided into 3 sets of 1 each, and 9 sets on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 sets in the circumferential direction, for a total of 9 sets. Further, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are connected by a chain line in FIG. 73, and four on the inner circumference are two sets of two near both ends, on the middle circumference. There are 7 groups in total, 3 groups of 3 each, and 2 groups of 9 on the outer circumference, 3 each near both ends. That is, in the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 sets are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 or 48 systems of LEDs 320a, a light emission effect in which the light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301 or light emission in which the light is concentrated in the center is emitted. It is possible to show the player a production and a light emission production in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 5a extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of one and the other in the left-right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction is different from each other. The door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body are provided. Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LED 422a and second LED 422b are mounted behind each of 435, and door frame left side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LED 423a and second LED 423b are mounted. The board 423 and the decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 432a and the second LED 432b are mounted, and the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame on which the plurality of first LEDs 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted. Is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to move forward. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member to be irradiated. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of the 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 emit light to make the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame can be light-emitting decorated (surface-emitting), and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward causes the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the door is radiated forward from their front end (front end surface). Guidance in the frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The portions corresponding to the tips of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be light-emitting decorated (spot-emitting) in a dot shape. ..

Therefore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a. A door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately causing the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b to emit light. The entire 426 and the right side decoration of the door frame 435 are luminescent and decorated in a plane shape, and a part of the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame is luminescently decorated in dots, or the left side of the door frame. Since the entire side decoration 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame can be luminescent and decorated in a dot shape, a variety of luminescent effects can be shown to the player. It is possible to make the player less bored and entertain, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

At this time, the system in which the plurality of first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated and the door frame right The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right lower decorative substrate 433 are separated are symmetrical with each other, and in each case, Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame. Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side. When creating the data of, for example, the data for the door frame left side decorative body 426 side can be diverted to the data for the door frame right side decorative body 435 side, or the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the door frame. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that of the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to easily create the lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). ) It becomes easier to construct data of more complicated lighting patterns, and it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a variety of lighting effects with a high effect. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a sufficient effect on the light emission effect of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the 101a.

Further, since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a have the same system. , First LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided in the above are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light guide shaft portion 427a and the guide by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, respectively. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are thinned so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. It is possible to make it difficult to see the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. The right side decorative body 435 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated in a plane shape.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that emit light and decorate in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the first LED 423a. (1) The LED 432a and the first LED 433a are used to decorate the parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in a dot-like manner. Because of this, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as light-emitting in a plane and partially in dots, and it emits bright dots in dots. The light-emitting effect can strongly attract the player's interest, and the light-emitting effect that emits spot-like lights that are not found in conventional pachinko machines can make the player "haha". It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrate 433 has a shape that is asymmetrical with each other, at first glance, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be identified. It is possible to prevent the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side from being mistaken, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative board]
Subsequently, using the door frame 3 as an example, the identification of various decorative substrates on which the LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the dish left decorative board 273, the dish right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted, and a non-white LED driver, a connector, or the like attached to the decorative substrate is attached to the rear surface side of the substrate. I am trying to do it. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is reflected to the front side so that the decorative body and the like in the front can be luminescent and decorated more brightly, and the front (player side). Therefore, the decorative board is made inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the substrate plate material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative substrates, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative substrate so that each decorative substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a with characters such as Chinese characters, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b with different colors (shown in shades of shade in FIG. 74). And have.

More specifically, as the character identification unit 7a, the characters "lower left" on the dish left decorative board 273, the characters "lower right" on the dish right decorative board 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. The letters "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , Each is given.

Further, the color identification unit 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification unit 7b is not provided on the entire surface of the rear surface but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. ..

The identification unit 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), sticking a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like have been described. The decorative substrate may also be provided with an identification unit 7 such as a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is provided with both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. However, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided with the identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), a decorative substrate having a similar shape can be easily formed. It is possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate can be used. The light can be reflected forward on the front side of the decorative substrate to make the front decorative body or the like brighter and luminescent, and the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance. Can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification unit 7b as the identification unit 7 is applied over substantially the entire decorative substrate, it is desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decorative substrate. ) Can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative boards are overlapped during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative boards can be seen, the desired decorative board can be easily found, and the labor required for the assembly work. Can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification unit 7b is different for each decorative substrate, the same color is used when preparing the decorative substrate required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate provided with the identification unit 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification unit 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative board necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative board is prepared or the prepared decorative board is insufficient. Therefore, the decorative substrate can be surely prepared as much as necessary, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the operator reads the characters of the character identification unit 7a. Therefore, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front surface and the rear surface of each decorative substrate are white and the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface, the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. However, the decorative substrate can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to make the decorative body brighter and light-emitting, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the light-emitting effect having a high effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional parts such as an LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side), so that the functional parts can be seen through the decorative body. It is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by seeing it, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so as to be inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Door frame action effect]
According to the present embodiment, the contact detector 393 provided at a desired portion for detecting the approach or contact of the player with respect to the plurality of contact detectors 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392, when the player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired portion. Predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 of the desired portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in the other portion and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detector 393 provided in the other portion changes due to the player approaching or contacting the other portion, the contact detector 393 still has the contact detector 393. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detector 393 at the desired portion is reliably detected. It is possible to prevent false detection.

In this way, the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 are appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Capacitance can be detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detectors 393, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. In the control means of the above, the number of channels for detecting the approach or contact of the player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for the production can be relatively increased. Therefore, more production means (for example, movable decorations, light emitting decorations, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, and the number of production means can be increased to give the player a wider variety of effects. It can be presented, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the contact detectors 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to be touched, and the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the gaming state. By connecting to the contact detection sensor main body 392 and detecting the approach or contact of the player to a desired part, control of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by means, one contact detection sensor main body 392 monitors a wide range of the pachinko machine 1, and the number of channels that can be used for the production is relatively large. The number can be increased, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other. Therefore, the sensor body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a part that is difficult for the player to see, which improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances the appeal to the player. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal for electrically connecting a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection body 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be obtained by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. In comparison with the case where the conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detector 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts is increased. It can be reduced, the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the wiring of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detector 393 can be eliminated, so that the contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor main body can be eliminated. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be easily embodied.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 When a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed arrangement of the contact detectors 393 is touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order. By switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the player, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection body 393 in order, and a player participation type production with high game characteristics can be achieved. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's fingers or the like approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press and operate. Then, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of the patching metal of the metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the button body can be detected via the contact detection body 352. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the 351 (effect operation unit 350).

When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected by using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 in this way, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, and the effect operation unit are raised and lowered. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. Therefore, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 use the effect operation unit 350 as a non-contact operation unit or the non-contact operation unit 350. It can function as a contact operation unit. Then, since the player can press the effect operation unit 350 that functions as the non-contact operation unit or the contact operation unit when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform the non-contact operation, the contact operation, and the pressing operation. Since various production operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons capable of only pressing operations, and other pachinko machines. By differentiating it from the machine, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is the contact detector 352 (button body 351). Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) in multiple stages, the effect corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, contact detection having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and appeal to the player.

Further, as described above, since the operation unit can perform various production operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, a player participation type production that enables the player's production operation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of directing operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the player-participatory directing, which reduces the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes formed therein, the player can use the plurality of holes to form the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 in the approaching or non-contacting state can be reduced, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, so that the button by the contact detector 352 can be increased. The range for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be widened. As a result, the contact detector 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press and operate is enlarged. When the contact detector 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect. When requested, since the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the production operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to be missed in the player participation type production, and the player participation type production can be surely participated. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the production.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the contact detection body 352 on the side opposite to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. It is possible to output the light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the intermediate decoration substrate 364 to the player side, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with the light emitting effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is provided on the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing, the contact detector made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. The effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the 352, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit The 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the contact detection body 352 can make the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without hesitation and operate the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to make the player participation type production more enjoyable and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, and the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced as compared with the case where the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, it is possible to easily provide the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to increase the degree of design freedom, which is more appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

Further, since the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant as compared with the expanded metal, so that the contact detector 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This makes it possible to facilitate the formation of an optimum shape for detecting the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detector 352 having a plurality of holes, and it is possible to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 352, which causes discomfort, and the button body 351. In the player participation type production using the above as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352. This does not mean that the time and effort required for cleaning can be facilitated, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean can be reduced.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, since the predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be produced. It is possible to surely entertain the effect output through (via) the operation unit 350 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect means such as the button outer decorative substrate 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 are placed on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detector 352. Since it is provided, the contact detector 352 is in a state of covering the effect means, and the contact detector 352 (effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly integrated. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit unit 350 (button body 351) provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, the effect is produced. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the player approaches the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the capacitance of the contact detector 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358. Alternatively, contact can be detected. Then, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present the player with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by the effect that has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the effect operation unit 350 and to the player. It is possible to surely notice the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350.

When the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end side (upward) of the elevating spring 365 when the effect operation unit 350 is projected, the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the elevating spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the elevating spring 365 is weakened and the urging force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the urging force of the effect operating unit 350 by the elevating spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the effect operation unit 350 can be projected with various sudden outputs, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less bored and to operate the effect. It is possible to entertain the effect of the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the sudden output of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350 with his or her fingers or the like, the effect operation unit unit has a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with each other, a strong impact is given to the player, which makes it strongly think that there is something good (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to raise the expectation for the hobby and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 is a press operation unit 303 capable of a press operation, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player is made to press the effect operation unit 350 to perform a game. A player can participate in the person-participation type production, and the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit 350 can be pressed, the player who puts his / her fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) can perform the press operation at any time. When a player-participation type effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is projected by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, so that the player-participation type can be obtained by the effect image, sound, or the like. It is possible to promptly make the player recognize the start of execution of the player participation type production without informing the start of execution of the production, and to increase the motivation for the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 to perform the player participation type production. It can be even more entertaining.

Further, since the effect operating unit 350 is projected by the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected by using the drive motor. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 can be easily and vigorously projected, and the above-described effects can be more easily exerted.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to set a plurality of capacitance thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different sudden output for each threshold. It becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the effect operation unit 350 in multiple stages, depending on each stage. By projecting with a sudden output, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player can move to the effect operation unit unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat by popping up by executing the player participation type effect. When they approach or come into contact with each other, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 comes into contact with changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the player approaches or contacts. Since the change in the capacitance of the detector 352 can be detected, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is based on the capacitance. The player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 and advancing (pressing) the effect operation unit unit 350 by the player, the effect operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button inner decorative board A predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as 364, the protrusion output adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward or approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is used as the effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). Can work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so that the effect operation unit 350 can function like the effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, the player can perform various production operations. Therefore, by executing the player participation type production that enables the player's production operation, the various production operations can be enjoyed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the portion of the button main body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 where the player contacts (the lower side of the upper surface portion 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect are set for each. It is possible to execute different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the period (distance) from the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the effect operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages, the effect is presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a feeling of operation to the contact operation), and it is possible to make the effect operation more enjoyable for the player.

Further, it is provided with an effect operation unit 350 capable of allowing the player to move forward and backward (pressable), a contact detector 352 capable of detecting the approach or contact of the player with the effect operation unit 350, and a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, in the player participation type production, the operation of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) and the operation of approaching or contacting the effect operation unit 350 with fingers or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), Etc. can be requested, and the various operations can increase the motivation of the player to participate in the player participation type production, and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production. Can be done. Then, when the player participates in the player participation type production, various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can make the player less likely to get bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to lock the effect operation unit 350 so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of advancing / retreating the effect operation unit 350 is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is made incapable of advancing / retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. It is possible to prevent the 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety by moving or shaking the production operation unit 350 without permission, which makes the production by the production operation unit 350 more enjoyable. Can be done.

Further, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having an electronic component such as a sensor IC or an output circuit is provided. The main body 358 can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, an output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be used as the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. It is possible to optimally correspond to the above, and it is possible to surely embody the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player is attached to the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. When the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 are brought into close contact with each other, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is provided. The capacitance of the button changes, and the player side is executed because the player side is subjected to a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The light shining on the button can strongly attract the player's attention to the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, and the player can be entertained by the executed effect. At this time, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 or the button inner decorative substrate 364 or the decorative body 398 is the button body 351 or the contact detector 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made to appear as a part of the decorative portion to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it unrecognizable to the person that the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized from the player side, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is likened to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (directing) is blocked, the player does not care about the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the above, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect of the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the outside of the button covered with the button body 351 or the surface member 396 Since the effect of irradiating the player side with light is executed on the decorative substrate 355, the decorative substrate 364 in the button, or the decorative body 398, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is moved to the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit). In addition to being able to function as in 302), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or brought into contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 approaches or the fingers or the like. By detecting the contact, the effect is executed by the decorative substrate 355 outside the button, the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, or the decorative body 398, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player participates in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers or the like are detected. Since it is possible to make the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 different according to the distance from the button outer decorative board 355, the button outer decorative board 355 depends on the movement (position) of the player's fingers or the like. The effect of the decorative board 364 or the decorative body 398 can be changed, and a wider variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button are detected. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 provided between the outer decorative substrate 355, the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button, or the decorative body 398 changes, the game of the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is played. The approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is used to detect the change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be a conductive member, for example. When the contact detector 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, it can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by thickening the vapor deposition film to have metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punching metal having an outer shape such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 appear to be part of the decoration. be able to. Therefore, the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 395, and the contact detection body 397, which cannot be recognized from the player side, can be used, and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance is increased by the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front surface side). It changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is produced by an effect presenting means such as a button outer decorative substrate 355, a vibration motor 356, an effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, a button inner decorative substrate 364, a protrusion output adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect display device 1600. 395 and the like (including the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body left 390L, the contact detection body right 390R, the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 397, etc.) Since the pachinko machine 1 is formed in the outer peripheral shape of the slingshot machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detector 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and a high appeal to the player. Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like due to the approach of the player's fingers or the like to the contact detector 395. Since the predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 by means, the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation unit 301. Since the contact detector 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the effect operation unit 301 seems to have a design, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 provided with the operation unit 301 can give a strong impact to the player, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of differentiating from other pachinko machines. Further, as described above, since the contact detector 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly have an interest in the contact detector 395 and the like (button body 351). It is possible to raise expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participation type effect of operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the contact detector 395 and the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape having a design, at first glance, some players may present the effect. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is produced by the contact detector 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or contact the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and make the player participation type production more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detector 395 or the like is static. Since the electric capacity is changed and the effect is presented by the effect presenting means, the player can be surprised, and the presented effect can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like on the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like The approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized. Further, since the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like, the player's fingers or the like approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like to make contact. Since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) in multiple stages, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player by presenting the effects according to each stage. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the outer circumference of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as a punching metal, an expanded metal, or a wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detector 395 or the like. It is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395 and the like, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detector 395 and the like, and make the contact detector 395 and the like stand out, thereby exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily embodied.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detector 395 or the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a designable one without forming the contact detector 395 or the like in a three-dimensional shape. it can. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust and dirt such as food and drink do not adhere to the contact detector 395 and the like, and the labor required for cleaning is easy. Can be. More specifically, since the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the irregularities, and it is troublesome to clean the stains. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the button body 351 even if the contact detector 395 or the like has irregularities such as punching metal, the button body 351 is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of dirt, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily cleaned.

Further, since the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395 or the like, a metal vapor deposition film or the like can be used as the contact detector 395 or the like. When a material that can enhance the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent the player from being worn early by touching it, and it is possible to enhance the durability of the contact detector 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detector 395 or the like is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 does not allow the player to directly touch the contact detector 395 or the like. Since it is possible to use a detector 395 or the like that is uncomfortable to the touch or that causes discomfort to the player, the degree of freedom of the material used for the contact detector 395 or the like can be increased, and the needs can be met. A contact detector 395 or the like can be formed by a suitable material.

Further, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like is changed by approaching or contacting the player's fingers or the like with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the like, the player brings the fingers and the like close to or comes into contact with the button body 351 by the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 and the like. Can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

Further, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 or the like. Since the effect presented to the player is executed via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, the button body 351 can function like a contact operation unit, and the presented effect gives a feeling of operation. Can be added, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of a plurality of operations, the player brings his or her fingers or the like close to or comes into contact with the button main body 351 to approach or bring the contact detector 352. When the (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry into the detection area such as a finger, the game is played through the button body 351 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364. Light emission effect that irradiates a person with light, effect that vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with (via) through the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and protrusions upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302 because the effect of applying impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player is executed through (via) the button body 351. You can do it. Further, at this time, since the player is given effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, and wind pressure through the button body 351, the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the motivation for operating the button body 351. Then, with the player's fingers or the like touching the button body 351 and pressing the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the fingers or the like, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303, so that the contact detector The contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 can entertain the player with various production operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be suppressed.

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 causes the button main body 351. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of the above, and it is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is provided. Can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

Further, since the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button main body 351, the player can see the light through the button main body 351. It is possible to easily add effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82A is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 82B is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch releases the pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 83 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 150c of the lower rail cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one minute from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 89 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 88, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 89).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified by voice (for example, "Please pull out the ball!") That the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 96) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 100 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball squeeze) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B and the bottom surface. Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g between the discharge portion 551j and the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. It covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface overflows. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the game ball B and the game ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552 g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, it exceeds the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the upper edge of the outer circumference. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B may be clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (right direction in FIG. 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment, such as a tank rail]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the tank rail when viewed from behind the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail or the like of another embodiment. FIG. 107A is a plan view showing the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, and FIG. 107B is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 106 as viewed from the front. Is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a) as viewed from behind. FIG. 108A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a marker line in FIG. 107 (a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of the game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107. In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 555A and the like of another embodiment include the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A. It is different from the one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of the present embodiment rectifies the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 555A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the front view of the first rail cover 554A, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball rectifying member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107A and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. The meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in the front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 555A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 555A, and a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends on the upstream side of the cover portion 555a in the left-right direction. It has an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at the portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A is rotatably attached so that the upstream end side extends back and forth and around the axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 555A. It has a flat plate-shaped rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row, and at the uppermost side. The game ball B is prevented from moving rapidly to the downstream side, and ball biting is prevented from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 555A or the like of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. ing. As a result, the electric wire (shown by the broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached becomes. It is possible to prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A due to the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to rotate upward, and the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward to fully exert the rectifying action, and the ball bites or the ball in the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of the game ball B. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It can be suppressed and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

Further, as described above, since the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A and prevent the occurrence of ball clogging, many tank rails 553A can be used. Place the terminal board or control board to which the electric wires are connected (for example, external terminal board 558) or the control board, or place the terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Subsequently, the substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. FIG. 111A is a front view of the substrate unit of another embodiment, FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and FIG. 111C is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 111 (a) disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the coffee line in (a), and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view cut along the cake line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion of the pachinko machine provided with the substrate unit of FIG. 111A, which is rearward from the door frame.

The substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above substrate unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of the present embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, the same components as those of the substrate unit 620 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the front base 661. A game that is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and distributes the out-ball passage 663 and the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one, and a ball pulling guidance unit 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right in the front view. The game ball B guided by the ball ejection guidance unit 627 circulates, and closes the ball ejection discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball ejection discharge passage 665. The passage wall member 666, which is attached to the rear base 662 as described above, is provided.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out-ball passage 663 and a ball ejection guidance portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. At the same time, a ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape in which the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a is open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also transparently formed. Therefore, the inside of the ball ejection guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, and it becomes easier to confirm ball clogging or the like. There is.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a extending to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction in the rear base 662 with the front open, and is open. The front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 is a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at a position substantially central in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies in a row while largely meandering in the left-right direction, the lower guiding section 663c that guides the game ball B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying section 663b downward, and the lower guiding section 663c. It is open downward and has an out-ball discharge port 663d for discharging the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball rectifying unit 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving unit 663a so that the left end side becomes lower. Further, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b becomes narrower in the front-rear direction toward the downstream side (left), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball discharging receiving section 663a. It is the depth. Further, the portion of the out-ball rectifying section 663b on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and in the vicinity of the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is on the same surface as the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction. It bends backward in a curved curve like a small crank. As a result, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663d) of the downward guidance portion 663c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided on the upstream side of the cranked portion of the downward guidance portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, the downward guide portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the existing portion, it does not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

Since the game ball B frequently passes through the out sensor 664, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch having high durability and long life is used.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , It is connected to the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 115 (a) and the like).

The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is located in front of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. That is, a gap of one game ball B or more is formed between the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guidance portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 and is larger than the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. The lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) Has a ball ejection port 665c that opens downward. The ball ejection port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

Further, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. In the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the game ball B flowing through the vertically extending vertical guide portion 665b alternately abuts on the plurality of protrusions 665d, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag shape and is distributed therethrough. The increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 is formed into a simple L-shaped passage by the lateral guide portion 665a and the vertical guide portion 665b, when the ball ejection lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B in the ball tank 552. , Many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664. It is detected by the sensor and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (pull out) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to remove the game ball B discharged to the ball pulling passage 580b side from the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the ball pulling discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the above. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. Can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to obtain an accurate game ball B. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (the number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning prize. The number of game balls B that have been accepted and discharged from the game board 5 by the winning openings such as the opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc., and without being accepted by any winning opening after being driven into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B received in the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and is the number of game balls B (number of shot balls) driven into the game area 5a. is there.

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is set to "Payout within a predetermined period". Calculate as "number ÷ number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, and an out ball is provided. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. Therefore, the game board 5 detects the "out ball". It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. The out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are used for many game balls B. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the distribution of the game ball B, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B. Can be.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball B whose flow speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifying unit 663b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B is distributed. Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the premature wear and damage of the out sensor 664.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 in which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out-ball detection unit), the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space is secured in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing a directing device in the secured space, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) more entertaining to the player.

Further, since the ball ejection discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game ball B is distributed through the vertical guide portion 665 b, so that the game ball B can be distributed. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the distributed game ball B, damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

Further, the out-ball rectifying section 663b that is meandering is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and the vertical guiding section 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d are projected is provided in the ball-extracting discharge passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the distribution speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that the ball is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball removal discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from the 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine, a wall, or the like provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and the other pachinko machines. It is possible to prevent the machine, the wall, etc. from being damaged. Further, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter from the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side. The discharged game ball B can be easily collected.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is provided with a game. Since the game ball B driven into the area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward, the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is configured. The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously circulating in the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is not easily damaged.

Further, since the ball ejection port 665c of the ball ejection discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, a portion for collecting the game ball B on the island equipment side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc.) to a position where it overlaps with the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the trouble of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the trouble of moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in a substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, a merging portion 663e that joins the ball ejection / discharging passage 665 is provided in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663. The merging portion 663e is open downward, and the end of the opening is an out ball discharge port 663d (ball ejection port 665c). The guide piece 667 projects shortly backward from the front wall at the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. .. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B provided on the rear side (inside the island equipment) of the island equipment. Etc.), the game ball B can be easily released to the island equipment side, and the game ball B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided in the main body frame 4. Even if the game board 5 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged in the front portion as much as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, when the out-ball passage 663 is moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., due to electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of many game balls B in the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the distribution of the game ball B can be obtained.

Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and open downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. It is equipped with a sensor cover 668 that regulates the downward movement of the 664.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guidance portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 detects the main body portion 668a which extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660, and the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the side opposite to the proximal end side of the main body portion 668a. Have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the base unit 660 with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f, which is opposite to the out-sphere rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to the locking portion 663g provided on the outer side of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has the locking claw portion 668c moved upward in a state where the out sensor 664 is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663. By rotating and locking the locking claw portion 668c to the locking portion 663g and closing it, the main body portion 668a abuts on the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and out. The sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is inserted. It is discharged downward through it. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When the out sensor 664 is replaced (removed), the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 is opened under the out sensor 664. The out-sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the dangerous contact object (for example, the outer frame 2) shown by the alternate long and short dash line. There is a certain amount of gap between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a dangerous object and the sensor cover 668 is prevented from being damaged. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, the out sensor 664 may be worn out and damaged at an early stage, but as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 comes into contact with a contact-risk object such as the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come into contact with each other. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 will open. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped downward during the game, the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risk object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Further, according to the embodiment of FIG. 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b. At the same time, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B is jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game ball B is jammed can be identified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game ball B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside and inside the ball ejection discharge passage 665.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game that was interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be restarted at an early stage. , It is possible to alleviate the irritation of the player due to the interruption of the game and suppress the decrease in the interest, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the burden on the game hall side. it can.

Further, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 is attached to the base unit 660. Since it is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from below, the outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). On the other hand, since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). It is largely applied to the end side of the base unit 660), and is relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, it is rotatably attached to one end side thereof. Since a large amount can be received, it becomes difficult to release the lock at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. ..

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 128 and the like. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment shown by omitting the power supply unit, the payout control unit, and the interface unit from the front right, and FIG. 119 (b) shows the board unit of (a) in the front left. It is a perspective view seen from. 120 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 121 (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along a coco line in (a), and (c) is a searcher line in (a). It is a cut sectional view, and FIG. 122 is a sectional view cut along the sieve line in FIG. 121 (a).

FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 disassembled and viewed from the rear. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the substrate unit of FIG. 119 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing prevention of intrusion of a linear illegal tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 119. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 119.

Since the substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment is the same as the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710 and other configurations, the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 and the above-mentioned substrate unit 620 are described here. The same components as those of the substrate unit 620A are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are not shown.

The substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the substrate unit 620 or the substrate unit 620A described above. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The substrate unit 700 is provided behind the first ball path 701 in which the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 can be distributed and the first ball path 701, and is discharged downward from the game board 5. The second ball path 702 in which the game ball b can be distributed, the first ball sensor 703 that detects the game ball B in circulation in the first ball path 701, and the game ball in circulation in the second ball path 702. It includes a second ball sensor 704 that detects b, and a ball pulling passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 is distributed. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are opened upward, respectively, and after each of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game ball B one by one. Discharge downward.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 in the game board 5 circulates in the first ball path 701, and the game board 5 has a general prize. The game balls b received in the opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. That is, the out ball is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, fraudulent acts are performed on the winning openings (winning opening sensors) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 of the game board 5. If this is done, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different, and it is possible to detect cheating on the winning opening.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 is attached to the front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 711. A power supply unit 620c is attached to the rear surface and a ball ejection passage 705 is provided between the rear base 712 and the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are provided. The front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the ball path member 713 and the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools. A security cover 714 that can be opened and closed, a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball ejection passage 705, and a passage wall member 715 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. The frame relay board 716 and the like are provided. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed.

The front base 711 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right, which is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving port 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall portion, and a elimination port 711b that opens at a position to the right of the center of the lower peripheral wall portion in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 has the ball path member 713 housed therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving port 711a. Further, the front base 711 rotatably supports the security cover 714 around the axis extending in the left-right direction on the front end side of the elimination port 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a long box on the left and right that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 by the front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball removal passage 705. Have. The ball pulling passage 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712, and the whole is opened rearward. The ball pulling passage 705 is closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. The portion of the rear base 712 above the speaker box 623 in the ball-extracting passage 705 (the portion on the left end side in the front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , The rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

Further, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and the second discharge guiding portion 712a of the ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding unit 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b protrudes forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens forward. , The entrance of the second discharge induction unit 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide unit 712a and the second discharge guide unit 712b are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b is open to the rear with respect to the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball ejection passage 705, the first discharge guide portion 712a, and the second discharge guide portion 712b are located to the left of the front base 711, which is the elimination port 711b, and are left. They are arranged in order from to the right. The outlet of the ball-extracting passage 705 has a large front end side and a small rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (FIG. 120 (b). ). That is, the outlet of the ball pulling passage 705 is formed to be larger (wider) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted and housed in the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , The step wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and the upper right shelf portion 713d inclined so as to decrease from the lower end of the step wall portion 713c toward the right. The rectifying wall portion 713e extending diagonally to the lower left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the position separated to the right from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e become higher toward the right and the upper right shelf. The lower shelf portion 713f extending to the right of the portion 713d, and the right wall portion 713g extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and the right. The upper wall portion 713h extending to the left from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the U-shaped portion connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opened upward. It has a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is located at a portion to the right of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends vertically upward from the lower end of the lower wall portion 713e extending to the left from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and from the left end of the lower wall portion upper 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The middle wall part 713k that is exposed, the eaves part 713l that extends downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall part 713k toward the left, and the lower shelf part 713f are short and vertically downward from the vicinity of the left end. It has a hanging wall portion 713 m extending from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713 m and a lower wall portion lower 713n extending to the left in parallel with the lower wall portion upper 713j. The lower portion of the lower wall portion 713n between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out vertically with a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, respectively, and a plurality of obstructions provided at intervals in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. Further, the ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, and a groove wall portion 713i. It has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 713p that partitions the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n in the front-rear direction.

Further, the ball path member 713 is notched in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f so as to be recessed from the front end and the rear end toward the partition wall portion 713p. It has a notch 713q of. Each notch portion 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled in the substrate unit 700. Dust, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by the lower wall portion upper 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and the sensor accommodating the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. It is surrounded by the lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p and the front portion 713s, and is behind the sensor accommodating portion in which the second ball sensor 704 is accommodated. It has 713t and.

At 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the parts between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. That is, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cable extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extends to the left from the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t to the left of the middle wall portion 713k. ..

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion on the lower surface of the lower wall portion lower 713n in front of the partition wall portion 713p, and the first ball guiding portion 713u projecting downward and opening rearward. Have. When the first ball guide portion 713u is assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half on the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is on the inlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. Facing. The first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B, which has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, to the right and then to the rear in front of the partition wall portion 713p. It can be delivered to the first discharge induction unit 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, a portion opened below the lower wall portion 713n (a portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing portion 713t). ) Is located below the inlet that opens upward of the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. As a result, the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be delivered to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d is located to the right of the right end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is located to the left of the left end of the elimination port 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the rectifying wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and is curved so that the left end side faces downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height at which one game ball B can pass. .. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can rectify a plurality of game balls B in a row and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B is distributed). Depending on the distribution amount of the balls B and the like, a plurality of game balls B may be caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 126). Since the rectifying wall portion 713e is located above the eliminating port 711b, when a ball clogging occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the eliminating port 711b. In the open state, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below, and the game ball B bitten from the tool. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging by poking.

By the way, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch portion 713q for clearing the ball clogging and dropping dust and dirt downward, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is provided. From below through the notch 713q and above the lower shelf 713f (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), and further, the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 701 and second). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Such insertion of an illegal tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, but there is a similar concern not only in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d provided with the notch portion 713q.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward. Even if the tip of the linear fraudulent tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it comes into contact with the obstructing rib 713o and the tip of the tip The movement can be prevented and further insertion of fraudulent tools can be prevented (see FIG. 127). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

In the parts of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower wall on which the notch portion 713q is not provided are located below and to the left and right of them. Since it is closed by the upper right shelf part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool is not inserted from below through the cutout part 713q of the corresponding part of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b, and the part concerned. No cheating is done through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dust and dirt are downward through the cutout portion 713q. Can be discharged to (see Figure 128). Dust and the like discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing portion 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b are the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall portion upper 713j, and the middle. It is housed in a space surrounded by a wall portion 713k. As a result, dust and the like do not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing.

Further, a wiring cable is connected to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the 713s in front of the sensor housing and the 713t after the sensor housing by a connector, and the wiring cable and the connector are connected. It protrudes to the left from 713s in front of the sensor housing and 713t after the sensor housing. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 project to the left of the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the sensor accommodating portion front 713s and the sensor accommodating portion 713t on the left side surface, it is formed on the upper upper left shelf portion 713b. Dust and dust that have fallen downward through the notch 713q are guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves 713l, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 projecting to the left from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the wiring cable and the connector from falling, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems caused by dust and the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, and a lower shelf portion 713f on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. The first ball path 701 is formed by the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guiding portion 713u, and the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712, and the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713. Left wall part 713a, upper left shelf part 713b, step wall part 713c, upper right shelf part 713d, rectifying wall part 713e, lower shelf part 713f, right wall part 713g, groove wall part 713i, and rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge induction unit 712b of the above.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the vicinity of the front end of the elimination port 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction. Further, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 122, the security cover 714 closes the release port 711b in a state where the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and is horizontal, and the elastic locking portion 714a is locked. The elimination port 711b is open when the rear end side is rotated so as to be positioned downward to make it vertical. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the elimination port 711b.

Since the security cover 714 can close the release port 711b of the front base 711 by closing the security cover 714, a linear fraudulent tool can be inserted from the release port 711b into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or first ball path 701 or first). It is possible to prevent the insertion into the two-ball path 702). Further, the security cover 714 is opened when a ball is clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, thereby opening the elimination port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B. Can be done. This ball clogging clearing work is carried out in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the security cover 714, when the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is at risk of contact (here, after the curtain plate in the outer frame 2). It is located below the height of the connecting cylinder portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 122). Therefore, in order to eliminate the ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713, after opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is kept open with the security cover 714 open. Even if an attempt is made to close the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , The open security cover 714 will come into contact with the contact risk from the front, but since the front end side of the security cover 714 is rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, the contact risk from the front. Since the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction when the security cover 714 comes into contact with the body, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 being caught by the contact risky object, and damage to the security cover 714 or the contact risk object can be avoided. ..

The security cover 714 of the present embodiment is open because the game ball B is rarely clogged between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f and is basically in a closed state. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to be difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball pulling passage 705 that is open to the rear. Further, the passage wall member 715 closes the portions of the rear base 712 that are open to the rear on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712a. (Ii) The game ball B that has been distributed through the discharge guidance unit 712b can be discharged downward. Further, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310. ..

In the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of the upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 are formed from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball b that has fallen to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball receiving port 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls the lower shelf portion 713f to the left. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf portion 713f, they are broken by the upper rectifying wall portion 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that has rolled the lower shelf portion 713f to the left falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is housed in the sensor housing portion 713s. After being detected by the one-ball sensor 703, it passes through the first ball guide unit 713u, and then is discharged downward through the first discharge guide unit 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case of being behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor accommodating portion 713t, the sensor is discharged downward through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712. Will be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game ball B circulates through the paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and is discharged downward. The front side is the first ball path 701, and the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p is the second ball path 702. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the front of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 to the rear of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 circulates in the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

Further, the base unit 710 uses the game ball B released from the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to pull out the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the ball pulling passage 705 of the rear base 712. It can be discharged downward through. The first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are island equipment. It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) where the game ball B on the side is collected.

According to the base unit 710 in the substrate unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are provided with a plurality of cutout portions 713q, dust is passed through the cutout portion 713q. Since dust and dirt can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from obstructing the distribution of the game ball B and suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and the like. Can be made to.

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board is opened from the main body frame 4. By removing 5, the presence or absence of ball clogging of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702) from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700). Can be easily confirmed. Since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with the notch portion 713q at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf are provided. When a ball is clogged with the portion 713f, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and the security cover 714 is opened, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball clogging can be eliminated from the tool.

Further, since the elimination port 711b opened downward is provided in the lower part of the lower shelf portion 713f below the rectifying wall portion 713e and the security cover 714 for closing the elimination opening 711b is provided, the elimination port 711b is passed through. In addition to being able to clear the ball clogging as described above, by closing the clearing port 711b with the security cover 714 under normal conditions, a linear fraudulent tool can be removed from the clearing port 711b through the first ball path 701. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being inserted into the second ball path 702, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714 around the axis in the left-right direction on the front end side, the main body frame 4 is opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If the outer frame 2 is to be closed, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a dangerous object (connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. It is possible to make people notice that they have forgotten to close it, and it is possible to securely close the security cover 714 and exert the security function of the security cover 714.

Further, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped inhibitory ribs 713o separated in the left-right direction and extending downward, they are linear. Even if the tip of the illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it can come into contact with the obstructing rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. It is possible to prevent further insertion of illegal tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being cheated through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is borne. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent activities.

Further, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank by the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Since the complicated distribution route is configured, even if a linear fraudulent tool is inserted from the outlet side of the first discharge guide unit 712a or the second discharge guide unit 712b, the intrusion is blocked by the complicated route. It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, since all the game balls B emitted from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). It is not necessary to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the above, the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and the game board 5 detects the ejected game ball B. It is possible to secure a space for the configuration, and by providing the effect device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining for the player.

Further, since the out ball is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball is distributed in the second ball path 702, the number of safe balls counted in the game board 5 and the safe ball by the second ball sensor 704 are distributed. By comparing with the count number of, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the game is played. Since a person wants to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is large, it is possible to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a high possibility that many game balls B will be paid out. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to be played. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, if a fraudulent act such that a large number of game balls B are paid out is performed, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual. , Other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against the fraudulent activity can be hesitated. Can be.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the staff of the game hall can see the same reason as above. Can detect fraudulent activity. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, obstacle nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay). Since there is a possibility of a defect in the board, the connector, the wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the defect at an early stage and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball pulling passage 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game ball B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704.

In the above embodiment, the out ball circulates in the first ball path 701 and the safe ball circulates in the second ball path 702, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first ball path 701 is not limited to this. The safe ball may circulate on the second ball path 702, respectively, or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 regardless of the safe ball and the out ball may be the first ball path 701 and the second ball. Any one of the ball paths 702 may be distributed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the solution opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elimination port 711b is opened and closed by sliding the security cover 714 back and forth or left and right. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 is separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 by partitioning by one partition wall portion 713p. The one that discharges through one of the two ball paths is shown, but it is not limited to this, and it is provided with three or more ball paths in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any of the ball paths can be used. The game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may be discharged downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 137. FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. .. FIG. 133 is a schematic explanatory view of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory and the like are transparent. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate 2003 that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B , The second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetism that acts illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 137 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169 and the like) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the front unit 2000 that is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And, further equipped.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large winning opening sensor 2402, an accessory winning opening sensor 2601, V. The purpose is to relay the connection with the winning opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate 2003, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at a further different position in the game area 5a. A game to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B at the gate 2003. The large winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the ball B, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The character winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the game ball accepted in the character winning opening 2006 It includes a V winning opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 that give B an opportunity to accept, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illegally acting magnetism in the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front start unit 2100 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021. It includes a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. ..

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have an accessory winning opening 2006. A gate having a side right middle unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. It includes a member 2800.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. And have. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with an accessory winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006. The gate member 2800 is provided with a gate sensor 2801 that detects the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2003.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 detects the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. After being accepted by the first start opening sensor 3002, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted by the winning opening 2006, and the winning opening 2006. It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

In addition, the back unit 3000 has a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. It is provided with a V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010 and a back back upper effect provided on the upper part in the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It includes a unit 3200 and a back-back-lower effect unit 3300 provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 below the back-back-up effect unit.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, FIG. 139 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line of the source in (a), and FIG. 139 (c) is (c). It is an exploded perspective view which a) was disassembled for each main member and was seen from the front.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view at the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to penetrate the lower full tank path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the front component 1000 is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range from the abutting portion 1006 to the right rail 1005 in the upper right corner of the front view, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. The spec sticker sticking part 1021 to which the spec sticker 1020 is stuck, the insertion pin 1022 for positioning the abutting part 1006 protruding from the rear of the spec sticker sticking part 1021 in a columnar shape, and the center of the insertion pin 1022. It is provided with a separation hole 1023 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The spec sticker affixing portion 1021 is formed to be one size larger than the outer shape of the spec seal 1020, and is deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the spec seal 1020 and is recessed rearward (FIG. 139). (B). In the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, the horizontally extending portion at the lower end and the straight portion extending vertically upward from the right end of the portion are on the contact surface for affixing the spec sticker 1020. It is set.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec seal sticking portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The abutting portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates from the front side to the rear side of the front component 1000. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends back and forth with a constant inner diameter. The separation hole 1023 is closed on the front side by the spec sticker 1020 attached to the spec sticker sticking portion 1021 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is closed on the rear side by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The inside of the separation hole 1023 is a closed space (closed space). As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is provided at a position near the edge of the spec seal sticking portion 1021 (spec seal 1020).

The separation hole 1023 of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 becomes small, so that it becomes easy to bend and the spec seal 1020 may not be sufficiently pressed. This is because if the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1023 in the spec seal 1020, and the appearance of the spec seal 1020 may be deteriorated.

According to the front component 1000 of the present embodiment, when the spec seal 1020 cannot be correctly attached to the spec sticker affixing portion 1021 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the rear of the front component 1000. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1023 and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear to the front with the tip thereof, it is possible to remove the spec seal 1020 so that the vicinity of the edge of the spec seal 1020 can be rolled forward, and the rolled portion can be removed by an operator. The spec sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker sticking portion 1021 by pulling, and the spec sticker 1020 can be reattached.

Further, with the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the spec seal 1020 is pressed from the rear by the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear. Can be easily removed from the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, so that the work of replacing the spec sticker 1020 due to a model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated from each other, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec sticker affixing portion 1021 by using the separation hole 1023. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the constituent parts of the above, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front by attaching the spec sticker 1020 to the spec sticker sticking portion 1021, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1023 and the separation hole for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of 1023, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 assembled on the rear side of the front component 1000 to which the spec seal 1020 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, it is necessary to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the spec seal 1020 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 1023, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) does so. Since it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned insertion (invasion) to the rear, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, and the illegal act is performed. In addition to being able to prevent it, since a trace is left on the spec seal 1020 when an illegal tool penetrates the spec seal 1020, it is possible to hesitate to execute the illegal act, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to the illegal act is provided. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker affixing portion 1021, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole is provided in the part where the sticker is affixed, such as the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012. It may be provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the front and rear and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

In the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 138, the large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side is narrow so that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 1008.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each protruding forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It includes two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and the player can reduce the visibility. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). This makes it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 169) that controls the game content, payout of the game ball B, and a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 133) that can set the game performance. It includes a main control board 1310 and a main control board box 1320 that houses a setting change board 1311 and is attached to a board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not they have been tampered with). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2601. It is connected to the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged and has a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and in the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged on the.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion port, the other equipment is arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the determination key ON signal can be set. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions in which the function of setting key ON and the function of setting key ON are completely different can be realized only by a single setting key switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although it is exposed, there is a "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting key switch As a route between the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is kept away from each other (separated from each other). At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed on the main control board 1310. (That is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern in which the signal of (1) is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring pattern with which the signal from is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting value of the setting value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary that the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As the above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it may be a condition that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is further operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. The setting change of the set value may be executed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The work of opening is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to set by the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a of FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value reaches the set value 6 which is the maximum value, the value is increased by 1 and the value is increased by 1 again to return to the set value 1 which is the initial value, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the setting key with the setting key switch 1311a turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return from the rotation position of the cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder rotation position). After pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the set value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is pulled out from the setting key cylinder as it is. It becomes possible to improve workability.

The person who changes the setting of the set value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g to the state of not displaying it, and switches from the state of turning on the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off the setting value.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the operation. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. Of these, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the setting key is turned on. Turn the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the set value is displayed to the state in which the set value is not displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is the power when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, the predetermined set value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set after the power is restored when the power of 1 is turned on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs when a power failure occurs momentarily). It is necessary that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by the setting key being inserted into the and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot is won is defined, a jackpot symbol The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched in the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 169 and the like), and this detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but this setting key switch 1311a was set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the key is turned on may be used. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a'can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a'by 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. It will be a molded structure. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also separated. In the main control board 1310 as well, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Detection from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 195. When not touching, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the enter key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and a determination key is input based on these firing reference pulses. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 was detected. When a range-finding sensor capable of performing the range-finding sensor is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range-finding sensor is transmitted. It may be branched on the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key switch clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. .. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and the main control MPU 1310a. It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and OFF was sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a uses the input pulse signal to set the setting key ON and the enter key ON. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the decision key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is set to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the key turned on 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by the rotation operation and the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key switch 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and OFF The voltage level of the signal is set on the main control board 1310 by using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) between the boards extending from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns on / off the setting key ON signal, turns on / off the enter key ON signal, and turns off the signal. May be determined to be ON / OFF. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Also, to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the button.), The color of the push operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressure operation unit. A different type of switch may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error release switch, the payout is performed as a route between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be close to each other (separate from each other). ) Is formed. Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this signal. May be good. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while the main control MPU 1310a is based on the signal from the error release switch. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit. The logic of the signal from the error release switch is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to create a command, and the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (turned on when the power of various control boards is turned on). When the time processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, and conveys that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. When this is done, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched and paid out on the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. Can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. The wire intrusion prevention part covers the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding to the portion. It becomes a structure that is molded into.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f with the error release switch, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (to press the pressing operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch or the pressing operation may be adopted. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Therefore, also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Turn the 1311a off by 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as a port input for the power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later. A command is created by monitoring in the process, a command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command receives this command. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included)) is described as "a modification of the decision key (13). May be described).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor The detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the input and these detection signals, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and creates a command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that transmits to the main control board 1310 and receives this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the payout unit). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (16)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was released from the door frame open switch. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (door frame open). The mode of the switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the enter key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, with respect to the main body frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. It may be prepared for 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is set to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Rotate the key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. The decision key can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control board. In preparation for 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). Aspect 2 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit. A decision key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover that covers one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A possible setting key switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (20)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch). Aspect 3 (aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate 2003 provided on the game board 5 Gate sensor 2801, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2401, large winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), main body frame 4 The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the above are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various sensors, etc.). (The aspect of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate 2003 in order to turn on the decision key, or various winning openings. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a was used as a stepping motor, a DC motor, and so on. The operation of the movable body (accessory) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) is operated based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, ranging sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, the operating position, or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (optical combination). The mode of the object sensor (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetometer in the game area 5a was detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the magnetic sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 and enter various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5. When a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity to make a ball is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'in which the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the vibration sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to play a game. The game board 5 and the payout device 580 are provided with radio sensors for detecting fraudulent acts in which the various sensors of the winning openings provided on the board 5 and the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 are malfunctioned to illegally acquire the game ball B. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (of the radio wave sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 350 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the above, and the detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set as the setting key switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (effect operation button). The mode of the unit (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separated. It may be housed in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and the setting key switch 1311a is set in order to prevent unauthorized modification. A wiring pattern in which a key ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switching button 1311b. As a routing with the wiring pattern in which the signal from is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the terminal (main control) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the board 1310 is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a). Signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Was formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) with the wiring pattern to be transmitted, but the wiring pattern to which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch Regarding the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of 1311a is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , The connector of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) separately from the MSCN, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. The other connector provided in 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "variation example (29) of the determination key").

Further, the mode in which the determination key is appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the above, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, and the like, which is advantageous to the player (that is, increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). Probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and the player is advantageous. There is a game specification in which only a single setting value has a probability (advantage) in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting value does not need to be changed at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since there is no need to use the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are assigned as the following contents by design change by software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of the total area of the RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of movable body (accessory)" is assigned and set as setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the set value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. (Characteristics) can be operated and the light emitting body can be turned on. Depending on the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demo production performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the time from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demo effect performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (character)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4 is assigned. 4 is assigned, and a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama-style production" as a setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies "historical drama-style production, movable body (role)" as a setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "variation example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is lowered (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement is completed to the minimum volume side end. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the setting value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement is completed to the end on the maximum volume side. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume or may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that are not dependent on the volume adjustment switch). Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice it, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 for specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 for specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is stopped) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness of the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 3. The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and perform gradation points of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). From the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, although it does not turn off, and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine), the lamp is moved toward the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target that the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body so that the light emitting body can be turned on, blinked, a gradation point, or the like. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) by the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). Aspect may be described as "variation example (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modified example (30) of the determination key.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (in some cases, it may be described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). is there).

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after the power is restored after the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key was turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the outer frame 2 is set. The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, in addition to the setting key being turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not have to be pressed (when described as "a modification of a predetermined set value display permission condition") There is). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. In addition, when the modified example of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not yet perform the interrupt permission setting, so that the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a to set the power at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (the momentary power failure that occurs). The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned on by the key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. Occasionally, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt permission setting or the like. While the game progresses, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then performs a set value confirmation display process. The game progresses by setting the interruption permission. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a is collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of balls of the game ball B is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is calculated by the base monitor 1310h. Display on. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modified example of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. When the game starts to proceed by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310 g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 129 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status and two for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the gate 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the gate 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 136. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 169) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like (see FIG. 169).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and is installed in a vertically long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes one left fixing piece 1601 protruding from the left side surface to the left and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding from the right side surface to the right. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the right inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two right fixing pieces 1602 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the left fixing piece 1601 side forward, insert the left fixing piece 1601 into the opening of the lock mechanism, and move the lock mechanism upward in the rear view. By sliding, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the table unit. FIG. 145 is an enlarged explanatory view showing the portions of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in FIG. 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and the gate 2003, which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A game to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003. The large winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the ball B, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided at different positions. Character winning opening 2006 that enables acceptance of game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. And V winning opening 2007, which gives an opportunity to accept the game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The grand prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning opening 2007 is located behind the game panel 1100 at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the second starting opening 2004.

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The table unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The first, which is provided on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has the second start port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out port 2021. It includes an attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have an accessory winning opening 2006. A gate having a side right middle unit 2700 provided above and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022, and a gate provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate 2003. It includes a member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 is in the left-right direction. Located just below the center.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the production unit 3160.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upwards, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Can be handed over to.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. .. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a gate 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 144 and the like).

In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the grand prize opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the large winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a large prize opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. It includes 2402 and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 169 and the like). Two large winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery result in which the second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2411 are drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003. Acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 with the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the above, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first shelf portion 2421 extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a first shelf portion 2421 from the left end to the left side in the front view. It is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2421 so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421. The second shelf portion 2422 forming the second starting port 2004 between the two shelves and the second shelf portion 2422 are located to the left of the left end and lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B. The third shelf 2423, which extends shorter than the second shelf 2422, and the third shelf 2423 are spaced from the left end to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and the third shelf. It has a fourth shelf portion 2424, which extends from a position lower than the portion 2423 so as to be lowered to the left and forms a large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2423.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2421 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400. The first shelf portion 2421, the second shelf portion 2422, and the third shelf portion 2423 are inclined at the same angle, respectively, and the fourth shelf portion 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2421 and the like. ing.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425 vertically extending downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421. The second standing wall portion 2426 extending to the same height as the above, the third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and the third shelf. The fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the portion 2423 to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400, the fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, and the fourth shelf. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the portion 2424, and a seventh vertical wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424.

The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the first attacker unit 2400. Further, the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424 and then lower to the right. Above and further down, it extends to the bottom of the first attacker unit 2400. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is provided on the first side wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2425, the second standing wall portion 2426, and the third standing wall portion 2427, and the right side of the first attacker unit 2400. From a position lower than the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, the fourth standing wall portion on the left side is inclined so as to be lowered to the left with a space between the first horizontal wall portion 2432 and the game ball B. It has a second side wall portion 2433, which is inclined so as to be higher toward the middle of 2428. The second lateral wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is located in the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430, respectively, from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2434 extending to the vicinity and a partition portion 2435 extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2434 to each other. There is.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 extends stepwise along the upper side so as to be lowered to the left, and the interval at which the game ball B can be distributed is provided between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423. It has an upper shelf portion 2436 provided so as to be open. The right end of the upper shelf 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2421, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424. Further, the upper shelf portion 2436 is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 forms the space in the space where the game ball B between the upper shelf portion 2436 and the large winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the left. A plurality of triangular contact portions in a plan view project into the space so as to be staggered in the left-right direction from the front wall and the rear wall. These plurality of abutting portions distribute the game ball B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the large winning opening 2005 is in the closed state.

The second starting port door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second starting port door 2411 moves forward due to the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protruding due to the urging force of the spring, and closes the second starting port 2004. There is. Further, in the state where the start port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second start port door 2411 moves backward by the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 retreating against the urging force of the spring, and the second start is started. The mouth 2004 is open.

When the start port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The grand prize opening door 2413 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and is provided so as to move back and forth. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by advancing and retreating the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 in the front-rear direction. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves forward by the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protruding due to the urging force of the spring, and closes the large winning opening 2005. Further, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves backward by the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 retreating against the urging force of the spring, and opens the large winning opening 2005. doing.

When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 projects forward. In this state, the second starting port door 2411 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the grand prize opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the game ball B cannot be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. That is, the grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the grand prize opening door 2413 (see FIGS. 144 and 145).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421 in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2421, and the upper surface of the second start door 2411 and the first After rolling the second shelf portion 2422, the second shelf portion 2422 is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the grand prize opening door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. When the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 May enter.

At this time, the game balls B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 are provided in a space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large winning opening 2005. The contact portions are alternately contacted, and the vehicle rolls to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the grand prize opening door 2413 is released from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2421, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425 and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2433, and falls to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2433. Due to the inclination of the portion 2433, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2021. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423, the game ball B passes between the third standing wall portion 2427 and the fourth standing wall portion 2428 and of the second horizontal wall portion 2433. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2433, and enters the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and the fifth. It is discharged from the discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2421 and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423 are both first. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2021, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate 2003, the plunger is turned on against the urging force of the spring. It retracts and the second start door 2411 moves rearward. Then, when the second starting port door 2411 moves rearward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427 and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it is discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the third discharge passage 3183 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, it is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts against the urging force of the spring, and the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 rearward, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. That is, the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430, and then partitions from the fifth standing wall portion 2429. After being detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 through the section 2435 or between the sixth vertical wall section 2430 and the partition section 2435, it is placed on the third lateral wall section 2434. It falls and is discharged backward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received in the grand prize opening 2005 and released rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the back front lower production unit 3160 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. , Is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below from the fourth discharge passage 3184.

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2435, and each is detected by a different large winning opening sensor 2402. Since it is released backward after that, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stuck between the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening sensor 2402, and many game balls B can be released in a short time. Can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141 (a) is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 (b) is a separation hole in the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center accessory. It is a side sectional view seen from the right side by cutting left and right at the site of. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. The closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from entering the rear (back unit 3000) through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance 2511 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The warp outlet 2512, which is made capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 are left and right. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 138 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, a second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700, and a gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

More specifically, the center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, and the like, and a lower right guide passage 2530. A transparent flat front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the front member, and a lower right guide passage decoration attached to the front surface of the front member 2531 and printed with a predetermined decoration. With a seal 2532 (see FIG. 141).

The center base plate 2540 forms a part of the flange portion 2502 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a guide passage flange portion 2540a extending to the right in a flat plate shape and a peripheral wall portion 2501 along the lower side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. The guide passage wall 2540b extending to the right from the portion of the outer peripheral surface in front of the flange portion 2502 so as to be lower than the guide passage flange portion 2540a, and the right end near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. After extending vertically along the side and extending forward to the same position as the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b, the flat plate-shaped standing wall portion 2540c and the lower end side of the standing wall portion 2540c are continuously extended diagonally to the lower left. It has a left guide portion 2540d that extends diagonally to the lower right and is bent. A gap through which one game ball B can pass is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B, which has flowed down from above to the guide passage wall 2540b, to the right by the guide passage wall 2540b, and then flows down from between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c. After that, it can be discharged diagonally to the lower left by the left guide portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 constitutes most of the lower right guide passage 2530 by the guide passage flange portion 2540a, the guide passage wall 2540b, the standing wall portion 2540c, and the left guide portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends in the left-right direction from the same position as the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right end side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, and the upper end side is above the upper end side of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. The lower end side is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 includes a sticking recess 2531a that is recessed from the front to the rear along the outer peripheral shape, and a separation hole 2531b that penetrates back and forth at a portion of the sticking recess 2531a that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in the front view. It has a plurality of mounting bosses 2531c for mounting on the center base plate 2540, which protrudes rearward in a columnar shape from the rear surface.

The sticking recess 2531a is recessed rearward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 (see FIG. 141 (b)). In the sticking recess 2531a, a portion on the left end side and a portion on the upper end side in the vicinity of contacting the left end side are set as a contact surface for sticking the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a round hole having a circular inner shape. When the separation hole 2531b is assembled into the center accessory 2500, the front side is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 attached to the sticking recess 2531a, and the front side of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 is closed. The rear side is closed, and the inside of the separation hole 2531b becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2531b of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and makes it impossible to sufficiently press the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. This is because if the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, and the appearance of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 may be deteriorated. Because.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, when the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the front member 2531 is attached. A rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear to the front by the tip thereof so that the vicinity of the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be rolled forward. The lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be reattached.

Further, with the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. Since the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a, the replacement work of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated from each other, the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2531a by using the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front by attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to the attachment recess 2531a, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2531b and to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2531b.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, it is separated by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 assembled on the rear side of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 is attached. Since the hole 2531b is closed from the rear and does not penetrate the hole that passes to the rear side unlike the conventional pachinko machine, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole in the game board 5 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being inserted into the inside or the part where the game ball B is distributed, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and inserted into the separation hole 2531b. Since the guide passage wall 2540b can prevent further rearward insertion (invasion), an unauthorized tool invades the inside of the game board 5 or the part where the game ball B is distributed from the front through the separation hole 2531b. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities, and the fraudulent tool pierces the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532, leaving a trace on the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532. It is possible to hesitate to execute the above, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory in the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge of 2500, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 can be obtained through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The decoration of the back unit 3000 can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600.

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if you want to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

In the above embodiment, the front member 2531 is provided with one separation hole 2531b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the separation hole 2531b is provided at a portion corresponding to the guide passage wall 2540b in the front view. You may provide more than one.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a portion (a portion on the right side in the front view) inside the bent left guide portion 2540d in the center base plate 2540. When the separation hole 2531b is provided in the portion, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b. Therefore, since the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b does not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, in this case, even if the illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the front, the tip of the illegal tool is pushed by the left guide portion 2540d to the game ball in the lower right guide passage 2530 or the like. It is possible to prevent B from entering the area where it is distributed. Further, in this case, since the right side of the left guide portion 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, the separation hole is separated from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled. A tool can be inserted into 2531b and the lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532 can be removed.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 140 to 145 and the like. The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes an accessory winning opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left.

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a bonus winning slot sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the bonus winning slot 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects an illegal magnetism acting near the bonus winning slot 2006 (Fig.). 146) and. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 is for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the accessory winning opening door 2611 and the accessory winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006. The accessory winning opening solenoid 2612, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 to move the accessory winning opening door 2611, and the game accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the sphere B and discharges it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. 2611 is provided.

The accessory winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a lower side that bulges from the upper end of the right side to the left. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the door. The accessory winning door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link pin protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. (The illustration is omitted). The lower rotation shaft of the accessory winning opening door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2612 and a link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so as to be slidable. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side substantially contacts the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the accessory winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the right side and the right side of the above. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the accessory winning port solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the accessory winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed by the accessory winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the accessory winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the winning combination When the prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the accessory winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the accessory winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the accessory winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the accessory winning opening door 2611 is tilted to be lower. It will be in the state of. That is, the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the accessory winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is handed over to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. After being sorted into crabs, it is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 144 and the like. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2022 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and a second guide passage B that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 backward. It has a two-guide passage 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape in which the first guide passage 2701 extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends rearward from the second sub-out port 2022 after extending downward from the first guide passage 2701. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged one above the other.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire area (see FIG. 144).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back. It can be handed over to the first back guidance passage 3156 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back front lower effect unit 3160. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guidance passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be delivered to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front effect unit 3100 of 3000. The game ball B delivered to the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back front lower effect unit 3160.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG. 142A is a perspective view of the gate member viewed from the front, FIG. 142B is an exploded perspective view of the gate member disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142C is a disassembled gate member viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 in which a lottery for the result of a normal lottery for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2003. ,have. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and its extension line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. A gap through which the sphere B can flow is formed. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

Further elaborating the gate member 2800, the gate member 2800 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and holds the gate sensor 2801, and is attached to the front surface of the gate main body 2810 to be predetermined. It has a gate seal 2811 on which the decoration is printed. The gate body 2810 is transparently formed.

The gate main body 2810 is provided in a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2810a that is long to the left and right, a sticking recess 2810b that is substantially rectangular and recessed rearward on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a, and an upper left corner of the sticking recess 2810b. An erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c, a separation hole 2810d penetrating the front plate portion 2810a in the front-rear direction near the right end of the sticking recess 2810b, and a pair of arm portions extending rearward from both left and right ends of the front plate portion 2810a. It includes a 2810e and a flat flange portion 2810f that extends outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the pair of arm portions 2810e and is connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e facing each other are far apart from each other by a diameter larger than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

Further, the gate body 2810 is recessed at a constant height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and the facing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e, and the accommodation groove 2810g for accommodating the gate sensor 2801g. And the rear extension portion 2810h extending rearward so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the accommodating groove 2810g from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e, and the rear extension portion 2810e from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e. It is provided with a locking portion 2810i for locking the gate sensor 2801 that extends rearward from 2810h and has a rear end bent to the left and is accommodated in the accommodating groove 2810g.

Further, the gate body 2810 is provided with a protrusion 2810j protruding into the accommodating groove 2810g at the intersection of the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. Further, the gate body 2810 includes a guide piece 2802 extending downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The sticking recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) deeper than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see FIG. 143 (b)). The erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed in a C chamfer shape that is larger than the chamfering of other corners in the sticking recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (attachment recess 2810b) has a long rectangular shape to the left and right, it is difficult to know the vertical orientation of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be attached upside down. However, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c can specify the sticking direction of the gate seal 2811, and the gate seal 2811 is in the normal orientation (the direction in which the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is aligned with the notch 2811a of the Kate seal 2811). Can be pasted. When the gate sticker 2811 is turned upside down and is to be attached to the sticking recess 2810b, a part of the gate sticker 2811 protrudes from the sticking recess 2810b due to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c, and the gate is directed to the operator. It is possible to notice the erroneous sticking of the sticker 2811.

In the sticking recess 2810b, a portion on the left end side and an oblique portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c are set as a contact surface for sticking the gate seal 2811. As a result, it is possible to secure a clearance for attaching the gate seal 2811 not only in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction of the obliquely extending portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the effective clearance directions when pasting the gate seal 2811 are three directions, that is, the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction, which facilitates the pasting work (see FIG. 183 (a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole extending vertically. When the separation hole 2810d is assembled into the Kate member 2800, the front side is closed by the gate seal 2811 attached to the attachment recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g. It is closed and the inside of the separation hole 2810d becomes a closed space.

The separation hole 2810d of the present embodiment has a long side and a short side in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may make it impossible to sufficiently press the gate seal 2811. This is because if the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 2531b in the gate seal 2811, and the appearance of the gate seal 2811 may be deteriorated.

The inner peripheral surface of the separation hole 2810d is on the same surface as the bottom surface (the surface facing left) of the accommodating groove 2810g formed in the arm portion 2810e on the right side. Further, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is formed smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i is formed with respect to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d. Protrudes short to the left.

In addition to the function of removing the gate seal 2811 described later, the separation hole 2810d is inserted with a core for forming the rear end of the locking portion 2810i which becomes an under part when the gate body 2810 is injection-molded. It can also function as an insertion hole, which facilitates injection molding of the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is formed slightly longer in the left-right direction with respect to a shape offset inward by a certain distance from the outer shape of the sticking recess 2810b. A C-chamfered notch 2811a corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is formed in the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, and the regular sticking direction (here, the vertical direction) with respect to the sticking recess 2810b can be known. It has become like. The entire back surface of the gate seal 2811 is a glue surface having adhesive strength.

According to the gate member 2800 of the present embodiment, when the gate seal 2811 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the gate body 2810 (front plate portion) By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of 2810a) and pressing the gate seal 2811 from the rear to the front with the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the gate seal 2811 can be removed so as to be rolled forward. The gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2810b by the operator pulling the rolled-up portion, and the gate sticker 2811 can be reattached.

Further, with the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and the gate seal 2811 is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof to attach the gate seal 2811. Since it can be easily removed from the recess 2810b, it is possible to easily replace the gate seal 2811 when the model is changed.

Further, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated from each other, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the sticking recess 2810b by using the separation hole 2810d, which is a component of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, it is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 2810d can be suppressed, and the separation hole 2810d can be prevented from being deteriorated by the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 2810d.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached. Unlike conventional pachinko machines, it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side, so a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire can pass through the hole in the game board 5 or in the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted into the machine, and it is possible to prevent cheating.

Further, since the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the gate seal 2811 from the front and inserted into the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d is further closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) into the rear of the game board, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, which is illegal. It is possible to prevent the act from being performed, and since a trace is left on the gate seal 2811 when the fraudulent tool penetrates the gate seal 2811, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act, and the deterrent against the fraudulent act is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 2810c is provided in the sticking recess 2810b to which the gate sticker 2811 is stuck, if the gate sticker 2811 is to be stuck upside down, the gate sticker 2811 can be stuck correctly. It can be eliminated, the operator can be made aware of the incorrect sticking of the gate sticker 2811, and the gate sticker 2811 can be stuck in the normal orientation, and the gate sticker 2811 can be stuck upside down. It is possible to prevent the product from being shipped as it is attached.

Further, in the gate body 2810, since the protrusion 2810j is provided in the accommodation groove 2810g, when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodation groove 2810g from the rear in a direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, The front surface of the gate sensor 2801 abuts on the protrusion 2810j before abuting on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, so that the locking portion 2810i cannot be locked on the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. That is, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the accommodating groove 2810 g in the direction in which the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 coincide with each other, the locking portion 2810i is locked at the rear end of the gate sensor 2801 to lock the gate. Since the sensor 2801 is held, it is possible to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong direction, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect related to the gate sensor 2801.

Further, by accommodating the gate sensor 2801 from behind in the accommodating groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 and locking the locking portion 2810i to the gate sensor 2801, the accommodating groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the sticking recess 2810b are rearranged. Depending on the side, the movement of the gate sensor 2801 in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction can be restricted and positioned, and the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) can be easily assembled. The cost can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole 2810d is located in the front portion of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is moved from the rear by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. It will be closed. Therefore, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is provided by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (attached). Since it is closed from the rear and does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a conventional pachinko machine, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity from being carried out.

Further, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810, the movement in the front-rear direction can be regulated, so that the gate seal 2811 and the separation hole 2810d are penetrated from the front. Even if the gate sensor 2801 is pressed backward by an illegal tool, the locking portion 2810i can be locked to prevent the gate sensor 2801 from moving backward, and the gate sensor 2801 can close the separation hole 2810d from the rear. It can be maintained to prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 is projected within the front projection range of the separating hole 2810d, the separating hole 2810d is also used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted. The gate body 2810 can be formed by injection molding.

From the above, the following technical ideas A to C can be grasped.

[Technical Thought A]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
It has a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorated portion in the front-rear direction and presses the attached decorative body from the rear so as to be separable. With the front member
A passage member is provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and has a passage portion through which a game medium can flow.
The front member
An accommodating portion that extends from the rear side of the decorated portion to the rear and is recessed from the rear end to the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side so that at least a part of the passage member can be accommodated from the rear. Is further possessed. "

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated part, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. , 2810 g of the accommodating groove corresponds to the accommodating portion, respectively.

As a result, in the front member, the separation hole is located on the front side of the accommodating portion. Therefore, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the aisle member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has the same effects as described above.

Further, since the front member has an accommodating portion, at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion from the rear, so that the accommodating portion can move the passage member in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front. It can be regulated and positioned, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by facilitating the assembly of the gaming machine.

[Technical Thought B]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
It has a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole which penetrates the decorated portion in the front-rear direction and presses the attached decorative body from the rear so as to be separable. With the front member
A passage member is provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and has a passage portion through which a game medium can flow.
The front member
It is characterized in that it protrudes behind the decorated portion into the front projection range of the separation hole and further has a locking portion for locking the passage member. "

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated part, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. , The locking portion 2810i corresponds to the locking portion, respectively.

As a result, the locking portion locked to the passage member is projected within the front projection range of the separation hole. Therefore, when the passage member is locked to the locking portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear. The passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the covering decoration portion and the locking portion, the separation hole can be closed by the passage member, and the movement of the passage member in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

Further, as described above, since the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the passage member can be moved backward from the front by an illegal tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even when pressed, the locking portion can be locked to prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent activity. Can be done.

Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected within the front projection range of the separating hole, the separating hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[Technical Thought C]
In a gaming machine
"A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
A decorated portion that is recessed rearward from the depth of the decorative body in the front-rear direction and that the decorative body is attached to from the front, and the decorative body that penetrates the decorated portion back and forth and is attached to the rear. A separation hole that extends from the rear side to the rear of the decorated portion and is recessed from the rear end to the front, and the accommodation portion in which the separation hole is located on the front end side, and the above. A front member having a locking portion that protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole behind the decorated portion, and
A passage portion in which at least a part of the accommodating portion is accommodated from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear and is locked to the locking portion so that the game medium can flow is provided. It is characterized in that it is "equipped with a passage member having".

Here, the gate seal 2811 is used as a decorative body, the gate body 2810 is used as a front member, the sticking recess 2810b is used as a decorated part, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) is used as a passage part, and the gate sensor 2801 is used as a passage member. The accommodating groove 2810g corresponds to the accommodating portion, and the locking portion 2810i corresponds to the locking portion.

As a result, a decorative body having a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorated portion which is the front surface of the front member provided on the front side of the passage member having the passage portion through which the game medium is distributed. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward from the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the decorated portion in the front member becomes Since the surrounding part protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion protruding forward of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decorative body decoration can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine by making it easier to exert.

In addition, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward, the decorative body is placed in the correct position by attaching the decorative body using the protruding periphery of the decorated portion in the front member as a guide. It is possible to facilitate the contact, reduce the failure of the decorative body to be attached, and suppress the increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, since the decorated portion of the front member is recessed rearward, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated portion must be in a recessed position when the decorative body is in contact with the decorated portion. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to remove the decorative body that is in contact with the decorated portion, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the decorative portion is provided with a separation hole, the decorative body is pressed forward by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, thereby easily releasing the contact with the decorative portion. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, at the time of manufacturing, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. By doing so, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the decorative body can be reattached. Further, with the front member and the passage member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof, thereby facilitating contact with the decorated portion. Since it can be released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion by using the separation hole. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work and reduce the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

Further, since the separation hole is provided in the decorated portion, the separation hole can be obscured or hidden from the front by attaching the decorative body to the decorated portion, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts through the separation hole.

Then, at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the front member from the rear, and the locking portion is locked to the passage member, whereby the accommodating portion, the locking portion, and the rear side of the decorated portion are formed. , The movement of the passage member in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction can be restricted and positioned, so that the assembly of the gaming machine can be facilitated and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. At this time, since the separation hole is located in the front part of the accommodating portion in the front member, when at least a part of the passage member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the front end of the passage member. It will be. Therefore, in the state of being assembled in the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member assembled to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes to the rear side like a machine, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the gaming machine through the hole, and fraudulent acts are performed. Can be prevented.

In addition, since the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body from the front and inserted into the separation hole, the passage member can insert (enter) further rearward. Since it can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the illegal tool can prevent the decoration. Since a trace is left on the decorative body by penetrating, it is possible to hesitate to execute fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, as described above, since the movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted by locking the passage member to the locking portion, the passage member can be moved backward from the front by an illegal tool penetrating the decorative body and the separation hole. Even when pressed, the locking portion can be locked to prevent the passage member from moving backward, and the passage member can maintain the separation hole closed from the rear to prevent fraudulent activity. Can be done.

Further, since the locking portion of the front member is projected within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which the core for forming the locking portion is inserted. The member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so that it enters the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B circulates mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 137, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N guides the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is rarely accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the second discharge passage 3182 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Then, after being detected by the first start port sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can pass through the gate 2003 or be accepted by the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. There is no sex.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”) can be promoted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the position directly above the gate 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is located on the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate 2003, by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. , The right side of the gate member 2800, and so on, so that the probability becomes lower, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-out port 2022. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the second back guidance passage 3157 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the back front lower effect unit 3160. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being connected to the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2022. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the first back of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is handed over to the guidance passage 3156, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 through the back front lower effect unit 3160. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700. Flow down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "per character", the character wins. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received by the accessory winning mouth 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the character winning opening 2006 is detected by the character winning opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in front of the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the distribution passage 3158 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 in the production unit 3100. By detecting the game ball B by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Then, the game ball B delivered to the distribution passage 3158 is distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by driving the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, but is detected by the loss opening sensor 3004 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is accepted into the V winning opening 2007, a privilege of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the character winning opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the character winning opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center character 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf portion 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2425.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second start door 2411 and the second shelf 2422. Then, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the left. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls on the third shelf 2423 or the grand prize opening door 2413 according to the momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclination. Then, after the fourth shelf portion 2424 is rolled from the large winning opening door 2413, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2424 to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

By the way, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the ball does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2421 but to the upper shelf portion 2436. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2436 rolls to the left due to its inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2436 to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the large winning opening door 2413, the large winning opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 are rolled to the left to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400. Is released to. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2436, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2436 and the timing when the big winning opening 2005 is opened, the big winning opening 2005 is reached. May be accepted.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the contact with the right end of the upper shelf 2436, etc., and the first shelf 2421 By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2421 may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2433. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2433, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below from the fifth discharge passage 3185.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003, the second starting port Since the door 2411 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that is rolling the first shelf portion 2421 to the left can be accepted by the second starting port 2004. There is sex. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf portion 2422 to the left, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are performed. As a result, when the "big hit" is drawn, the big winning opening door 2413 moves and the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left , It will be accepted in the big prize opening 2005 with high probability. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the second shelf 2422 to the left, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and flow down diagonally to the lower right to the second shelf 2422 and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2423. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third vertical wall 2427 and the fourth vertical wall 2428 and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2433 and is received by the first sub-out port 2021.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is not accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2021. If this is the case, the game is discharged downward from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the rear and lower part of the game panel 1100 which is outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and the game ball B is accepted, and the "feature hit" or "feature hit" or " It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result such as "big hit" or the second special lottery result. While the first start port 2002 is always open, the second start port 2004 needs to let the gate 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) the "normal hit" as the result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the "feature hit" or "big hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery, the big winning opening 2005 or the winning combination 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 or the character winning opening 2006, and the large winning opening 2005 or the character winning opening 2006 It is possible to raise the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B in the game.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate 2003 depending on the guide passage to be distributed. Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2022, it is possible to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. You can enjoy the driving operation of.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the first in the open state. (Ii) Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the starting port 2004 and a "feature hit" or a "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[5-8j. Magnetic sensor]
Subsequently, the plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor capable of detecting the magnetic field line from the magnet, and FIG. 147 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the direction of the magnetic sensor unable to detect the magnetic field line from the magnet. ) Is an explanatory view schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor by a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which the magnetic field lines from the magnet cannot be detected. e) is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, and FIG. 148 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated. Is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross section.

A plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5 and are for detecting an illegal magnetism (magnetic field line) acting in the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 includes a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052 having a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, a sensor board 1052, and a sensor body 1051. It is provided with a transparent sensor case 1053 that covers the surface. Although not shown, an IC, a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a connector for connection, and the like are mounted on the sensor board 1052 in addition to the sensor body 1051.

The magnetic sensor 1050 has a rectangular shape in a plan view, is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape having a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one portion of the side in the height direction is C-chamfered. The magnetic sensor 1050 can visually recognize the internal sensor body 1051 and the sensor substrate 1052 from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic lines of force parallel to the longest side of a rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship between the magnet 1055 as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass in the direction parallel to the long side, so that the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 Can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship of the magnet 1055 as shown in FIG. 147 (b), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 are in the direction perpendicular to the long side (with respect to the rectangular surface of the long side and the short side). Because it passes in the vertical direction), the magnetism (magnetic field line) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

Therefore, as shown by shading in FIG. 147 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection region of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side in the long side direction centered on the magnetic sensor 1050. Has a DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection region DA in which two spheres are combined.

Then, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 are provided in appropriate directions, respectively. Each magnetic sensor 1050 has an illegal magnetism acting in the vicinity of the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the warp entrance 2511 in the game area 5a. Is arranged so that it can detect. That is, each magnetism is included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 146) in the game area 5a where it is predicted that a fraudulent act using a magnet will be performed. The sensor 1050 is arranged in an appropriate orientation.

Further, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is transmitted from a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a bonus winning port solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid, a drive motor provided on the back unit 3000, and the like. In order not to detect magnetism (lines of magnetic force), each detection area DA is prevented from being applied to the solenoid or the drive motor.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (d), when the magnetic body 1056 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines are attracted to the magnetic body 1056. The number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 may decrease, and the magnetic lines of force (magnetism) from the magnet 1055 may not be detected by the magnetic sensor 1050.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147 (e), when the magnetic body 1057 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines are attracted by the magnetic body 1057, resulting in magnetism. The lines of magnetic force passing through the sensor 1050 can be increased. This makes it possible to detect the magnetism of a distant magnet 1055 or a magnet 1055 having a weak magnetic force.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board by using a screw made of a magnetic material, depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, the magnetic field line from the magnet for cheating is generated. By being attracted to a screw having a high magnetic permeability, the number of lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor is reduced, and there is a problem that the approach of a magnet cannot be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has an accommodating portion 1061 capable of accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 locked to the magnetic sensor 1050 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061. Further, the holding member 1060 has a protrusion 1063 protruding from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062 into the accommodating portion 1061. The holding member 1060 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the accommodating portion 1061 from the outside, the holding member 1060 is elastically deformed in the direction in which the elastic claw 1062 is moved away from the accommodating portion 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1061, the elastic claw is elastic. The 1062 returns and is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed against a portion of the inner surface of the accommodating portion 1061 opposite to the elastic claw 1062. There is.

By locking the elastic claw 1062, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of exiting from the accommodating portion 1061, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is pressed into the accommodating portion 1061 by the contact of the protrusion 1063, rattling of the magnetic sensor 1050 in the accommodating portion 1061 can be prevented.

In this way, since the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting the magnetic field lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, and the magnetic sensor. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity using the magnet at an early stage, and the fraudulent activity is notified by notifying the detection of the suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, since the holding member 1050 made of a non-magnetic material can prevent the magnetic field lines from being attracted from the magnet and prevent the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing, the number of magnetic lines is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine. The sensor 1050 makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. ..

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1060. Therefore, it is made of a metal made of a magnetic material like a conventional pachinko machine. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1062 without using the screw of the above, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated, which increases the cost of the pachinko machine 1. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged (pressed) to the accommodating portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. It is possible to reduce the disconnection of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 or the occurrence of poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be reliably operated.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and provided on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 to be attached to the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, it can be provided at a position outside the magnetic detection region DA in the game region 5a. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws for attaching the holding member 1060 to the game board 5 can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 reliably detects the magnetism acting on the game area 5a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power against fraudulent acts using magnets.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by the transparent holding member 1050 and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body mounted on the sensor board 1052 through the transparent sensor case 1053. The 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and the person who tries to cheat using the magnet by seeing the magnetic sensor 1050 is cheated. It is possible to hesitate to execute the above, increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts, and reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor board 1052 is a decorative board on which the LED is mounted. Can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it is not a concern for a normal player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated.

Further, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, it is possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, so that the time and effort required for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 149 and the like. FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 149 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism (not shown) for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front effect unit 3100 provided near the front end in the back box 3010 and a back back upper effect provided on the upper part in the back box 3010 on the rear side of the back front effect unit 3100. It includes a unit 3200 and a back-back-lower effect unit 3300 provided in the lower part of the back box 3010 below the back-back-up effect unit.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame to the right on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which a lock mechanism is attached, near the center of the left side in the vertical direction.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. A lock mechanism is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back front effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back unit 3000 detects the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000 and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. After being accepted by the first start opening sensor 3002, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 after being accepted by the winning opening 2006, and the winning opening 2006. It has a loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B distributed to the loss opening 2008 (see FIG. 169 and the like).

Further, the back unit 3000 has a V winning opening door 3006 that can be moved back and forth to open and close the V winning opening 2007, and a game ball that has been accepted into the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving the V winning opening door 3006 back and forth. It is provided with a V distribution solenoid 3007 that distributes B to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. These general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, V winning opening sensor 3003, loss opening sensor 3004, V winning opening door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front effect unit 3100. ..

[5-9a. Back front production unit]
Subsequently, the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back front effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back front effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front effect unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, FIG. 152 (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and FIG. It is an enlarged sectional view of the right part in (a). FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. In FIG. 154, the back front left decorative unit is disassembled, and only the back front left first decorative body, the back front left second decorative body, the back front left third decorative body, and the back front left decorative body base are viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back front left first decorative body shown in a transparent state, FIG. 155 (b) is a front view of the back front left second decorative body shown in a transparent state, and FIG. It is a front view of the back front left third decorative body shown in a transparent state, and (c) is the front view of the back front left decorative body base shown in a transparent state.

FIG. 156 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front effect unit and the decorative substrate for light emitting and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decoration unit, and FIG. 156 (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back front effect unit and the decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for making the decorative body of the back front lower production unit light-emitting decoration in 1 FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the back front left decoration unit is light-emittingly decorated. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and FIG. 158 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. 160 is a front view of the back front effect unit showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

The back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end in the back box 3010. The back front effect unit 3100 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3110 provided in the center of the front view, a back front left decoration unit 3120 provided on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, and a right end portion of the light guide plate 3110. The back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the side and the lower ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 are connected to each other. It includes a back front lower effect unit 3160, and an upper connection base 3190 that connects the upper ends of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 was received by the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. The V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B that is later distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and the game ball B that is distributed to the losing opening 2008 after being accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 are detected. It is equipped with a loss opening sensor 3004. Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is a V winning opening door for distributing the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. It is provided with a 3006 and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for advancing / retreating (opening / closing) the V winning opening door 3006.

The back front lower effect unit 3160 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the above is provided.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back-front effect unit 3100 has only the first pattern 3111 (see FIG. 158 (a)), which is displayed by reflecting only the light from the left and right forward, and the light from the specific part below. The second pattern 3112 (see FIG. 158 (b)), which is light-emittingly displayed by reflecting the image forward, is provided. That is, the light guide plate 3110 includes a plurality of LEDs 3128 g for the light guide plate of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the back front right first decorative substrate 3148 and the back front right in the back front right decoration unit 3140. When the second decorative substrate 3149 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs of the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 can be emitted and displayed. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are made to emit light, the second pattern 3112 can be emitted and displayed.

As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a pattern in which the letter "A" in the center is stylized and a pattern in which the "wings" on both the left and right sides of the light guide plate 3110 are spread out. .. As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 is configured so that the shade and the degree of light emission of the light emitting display differ depending on the part of the pattern, and the design and decorativeness of the pattern are enhanced. More specifically, in FIG. 158 (a), the first pattern 3111 is composed of a plurality of points in which the shaded area has the darkest shade and emits light with the color of the light from the LED, and the shade is the lightest. The portion is composed of a plurality of points that disperse the cocktail light from the LED and emit light, and the other shaded portions are composed of a plurality of lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, the cocktail light is a color containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the yellow light component is dispersed into red light and green light, and the red or green light is dispersed in the portion. The part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting part as cocktail light, the white light component is dispersed into red light, green light, and blue light, and the part that looks red, green, or blue in the relevant part or , Light of a color in which they are appropriately mixed appears, and it is possible to show rainbow-colored glittering light emission. When the spectroscopic light emitting unit is irradiated with light of only one of the three primary colors of light, the light does not have a component to be dispersed, so that the light of the color is used for light emission. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting unit can emit light in a single color or in a plurality of glittering colors depending on the color of the emitted light, and can produce a wider variety of light emission effects. it can.

The LEDs (LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate, etc.) for displaying the first pattern 3111 by emitting light are the back front left decorative substrate 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right first decorative substrate 3148 of the back front right decoration unit 3140. , The back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward centering on a plurality of portions spaced in the left-right direction near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of a plurality of points that emit light in the same color as the LED 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, which will be described later. The plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are formed so as to reflect only the light from the corresponding LED 3176 forward, and are formed so that each can independently emit and display light. ing.

In the second pattern 3112, a plurality of lines 3113 have five line groups 3114, from the left, the first line group 3114a, the second line group 3114b, the third line group 3114c, the fourth line group 3114d, and the fifth line group 3114e. It is divided into. Each line group 3114 is composed of five lines 3113 from the left: the first line 3113a, the second line 3113b, the third line 3113c, the fourth line 3113d, and the fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 of the first line 3113a to the fifth line 3113e in one line group 3114 have their lower ends arranged at the same positions, and extend upward radially with the lower end positions as the center.

With the light emitting display of the second pattern 3112, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if it were a searchlight from below on the concert stage, and it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a look gorgeous and to entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

The LED 3176 for displaying the second pattern 3112 by light emission is mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 in the back front effect unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decoration unit]
The back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long back front left logo composed of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. It is provided above the decoration part 3121 and the back front left logo decoration part 3121, and is provided on the left side of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left logo decoration part 3121 which are stylized letters "A". It has a back front left sub-decorative part 3123 and.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 is a rectangular and transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 having a long vertical shape and a transparent back front left provided behind the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second decorative body 3125, the transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 provided behind. It is equipped with a front left decorative base 3127.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 is used to illuminate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and the back front left sub decoration portion 3123. The front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 for luminescent decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 for luminescent decoration. The front left lower decorative substrate 3130 and the like are provided.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left reflector 3131 provided on the right side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and a back front upper left reflector 3132 provided on the lower side of the back front upper left decorative board 3129. The back front lower left lower reflector 3133 provided on the upper side of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is provided.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a left diffusion lens 3134 provided between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is a back front left decorative body 3125, a back front left third decorative body 3126, a left diffusion lens 3134, and a back front left decorative body base so as to sandwich the left end portion of the light guide plate 3110. It is attached to the front surface of 3127. The back front left first decorative body 3124 is a transparent flat plate and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The back front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative portion 3124a extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion having a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b penetrating the front and back. The plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper end and the lower end, and near the upper side of the right end of the partition decorative portion 3124a. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b is formed in a rhombus shape in which the four sides of the square are replaced with arcs that bulge inward.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3124a on the front surface, and forms a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, and the front front left logo decorative portion 3124c. It has a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration portion 3124d provided at a portion corresponding to the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c on the rear surface. The right side of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape along the character strings of the logos of the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d.

Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3124a on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e. And a plurality of first left sub-decorative portions 3124f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e constitutes the outermost portion of the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is formed into a cloisonne pattern in which circles of the same size are stacked in quarters and one circle is extracted, and a rhombus pattern in which the outer circle of the cloisonne pattern is eliminated. It is lined up and down.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (a). The first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be visually recognized.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back front left second decorative body 3125 in a state of being assembled in the back front left decorative unit 3120, so that the right side side is located behind the left side side. It is installed in an inclined state (see FIG. 152). Further, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located so that the left side surface is in contact with the right side surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 in the assembled state, and the back side thereof is on the left side. The first lower LED 3128a and the first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are located. Further, in the assembled state of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is located above the upper surface, and the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the lower surface. One LED 3130a is located.

When the back front left first decorative body 3124 emits light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the substrate holding portion of the back front left second decorative body 3125 The first front left logo decoration part 3124c and the first back left logo decoration part are caused by the light incident on the inside from the part below the partition decoration part 3124a on the left side surface via the 3125b and the light incident on the inside from the lower surface. The 3124d and the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f illuminate and decorate. At this time, the inner surface of the partitioning decorative portion 3124a and the inner surface of the penetrating decorative portion 3124b provided near the lower end are also light-emittingly decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3124a and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3124a. Light from the first lower LED 3128a of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 causes the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e above the partition decoration portion 3124a to be almost emitted (emission decoration). Only the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, and the first left sub decoration part 3124f can be brightly emitted and displayed.

Further, when the back front left first decorative body 3124 emits light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative board 3129, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is subjected to light emission. The first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e is light-emitting and decorated by the light incident on the inside from the portion above the partition decoration portion 3124a on the left side surface via the holding portion 3125b and the light incident on the inside from the upper surface. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3124a and the penetrating decoration portion provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a are also light-emittingly decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3124a, when the light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3124a, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3124a. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3124a reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3124a and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3124a. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3124a. Light from the first upper LED 3128b of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 causes the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d below the partition decoration portion 3124a. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is hardly light-emitting (light-emitting decoration), and only the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the upper penetrating decorative portion 3124b can be brightly light-emittingly displayed.

As described above, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light-emitting display) with the partitioning decoration portion 3124a as a boundary.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the periphery excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3125a ( It has a substrate holding portion 3125b provided on the left side, the upper side, and the lower side). The substrate holding portion 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed from the rear surface side to the front. The substrate holding portion 3125b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 to sandwich and hold the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130. It is for doing. In the back front left second decorative body 3125, the front surface of the substrate holding portion 3125b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side side is located behind the left side side. ing.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a partition decorative portion 3125c extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3125a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. There is. The partition decoration portion 3125c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3125c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped second back left logo decorative portion that forms a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. It has 3125d. The right side of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d.

Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3125c on the back surface, and forms a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. And a plurality of second left sub-decorative portions 3125f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e is formed to be one size smaller than the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decorative portion 3125f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and is formed in a similar shape that is one size smaller.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (b). The second back left logo decoration portion 3125d, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e, and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f can be visually recognized.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled on the back front left decorative unit 3120, and the back front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. At the same time, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is located behind. Further, in the assembled state, the back front left second decorative body 3125 has a front end side of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the back front left reflector 3131, and the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in the board holding portion 3125b recessed forward. The front end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, and the front end side of the back front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The second lower LED 3128c and the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is on the upper surface, and the back front is on the lower surface. The second LED 3130b of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 is located respectively.

When the back front left second decorative body 3125 emits light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, it is formed from the partitioning decorative part 3125c on the left side of the decorative board part 3125a. The second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f emit light and decorate with the light incident on the inside from the lower portion and the light incident on the inside from the lower surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also light-emittingly decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3125c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. Light from the second lower LED 3128c of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 causes the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e above the partition decoration portion 3125c to be almost emitted (emission decoration). However, only the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the second left sub decoration portion 3125f can be displayed in bright light.

Further, when the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is a partitioning decorative portion on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a. The second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e is light-emitting and decorated by the light incident on the inside from the portion above the 3125c and the light incident on the inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3125c is also light-emittingly decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3125c, when the light incident inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3125c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3125c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3125c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3125c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3125c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3125c. Most of the second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the second left sub decoration part 3125f below the partition decoration part 3125c due to the light from the second upper LED 3128d of the left decoration board 3128 and the second LED of the back front upper left decoration board 3129. There is no light emission display (light emission decoration), and only the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e can be brightly displayed by light emission.

As described above, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light luminescent display) with the partitioning decorative portion 3125c as a boundary.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent, and is a flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion parallel to the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left second decorative body 3125. It has a 3126a and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3126a. In the back front left third decorative body 3126, the rear surface of the flange portion 3126b is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, whereas the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side side is located behind the left side side. There is.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 has a partition decorative portion 3126c extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth at a portion of the decorative plate portion 3126a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom. There is. The partition decoration portion 3126c is formed to have the same size and height as the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c on the rear surface, and is a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative portion that forms a part of the back front left logo decorative portion 3121. It has 3126d. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape along the character string of the logo of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d.

Further, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is provided in a relief shape above the partition decorative portion 3126c on the back surface, and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122. And a plurality of third left sub-decorative portions 3126f which are provided in relief shape on the left side of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d on the back surface and form a part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. have. The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e is formed to be one size smaller than the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f is provided at a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and has the same size between the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f. It is formed in a proper shape.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that it is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (c). The third back left logo decoration portion 3126d, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e, and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f can be visually recognized.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 is assembled in the back front left decorative unit 3120, and as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the back front left first decorative body 3124 are in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a. (Ii) The decorative plate portion 3125a of the decorative body 3125 is located, and the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located rearward. Further, in the assembled state of the back front left third decorative body 3126, the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are on the left side of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the back is above the upper surface. The third LED of the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is located below the lower surface, and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is located below the lower surface, respectively.

When the back front left third decorative body 3126 emits light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the partition decorative portion 3126c on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a The third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f are luminescently decorated by the light incident on the inside from the lower portion and the light incident on the inside from the lower surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also light-emittingly decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner peripheral surface, the light is emitted. A part of the light arriving by the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side below the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3126c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side above. In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partitioning decorative portion 3126c. Light from the third lower LED 3128e of the left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 causes the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e above the partition decoration portion 3126c to be almost emitted (emission decoration). However, only the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the third left sub decoration portion 3126f can be displayed in bright light.

Further, when the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is a partitioning decorative portion on the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a. The third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e is light-emitting and decorated by the light incident on the inside from the portion above the 3126c and the light incident on the inside from the upper surface of the decoration plate portion 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decoration portion 3126c is also luminescently decorated.

In the partition decorative portion 3126c, when the light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner peripheral surface, the inside thereof A part of the light arriving by the peripheral surface is reflected to the inner side above the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the rest is radiated from the inner peripheral surface to the inside of the hole of the partition decorative portion 3126c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the partition decoration portion 3126c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side, a part of the light is reflected inside the partition decoration portion 3126c and the rest is reflected from the inner peripheral surface to the partition decoration portion 3126c. It will be incident on the inner side below. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the partition decorative portion 3126c. Most of the third back left logo decoration part 3126d and the third left sub decoration part 3126f below the partition decoration part 3126c due to the light from the third upper LED 3128f of the left decoration board 3128 and the third LED of the back front upper left decoration board 3129. There is no light emission display (light emission decoration), and only the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e can be brightly displayed by light emission.

As described above, the back front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper side and the lower side can be independently luminescently decorated (light luminescent display) with the partitioning decorative portion 3126c as a boundary.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and is provided on the flat plate-shaped decorative plate portion 3127a and the periphery (left side, upper side, lower side) excluding the right side of the decorative plate portion 3127a. It has a holding portion 3127b and. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The substrate holding portion 3127b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3127a, has a rear surface located rearward, and is recessed from the front side to the rear. The substrate holding portion 3127b cooperates with the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 to sandwich the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130. It is for holding. Further, in the substrate holding portion 3127b, the left end portion of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion, and the upper left end portion of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion.

Further, the back front left decorative body base 3127 extends up and down at a constant height over the entire width near the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, and is provided at intervals above and below. The three back front left band decoration parts 3127c and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d which is provided in a relief shape near the upper part on the rear surface of the decoration plate part 3127a and constitutes a part of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122. ,have. The base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d is formed to be one size smaller than the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in FIGS. 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the back is provided from the front to the rear as shown in FIG. 155 (d). The front left band decoration part 3127c and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d can be visually recognized.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is assembled on the back front left decorative unit 3120, and as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a. Further, in the assembled state, the back front left decorative body base 3127 has the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front left reflector 3131 rear end side, and the back front upper left decorative board 3129 in the board holding portion 3127b recessed rearward. The rear end side of the back front upper left reflector 3132, the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, and the rear end side of the back front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted, respectively. The LED 3128h below the base and the LED 3128i above the base of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are located on the left side of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a, respectively.

When the back front left decorative body base 3127 emits light from the under-base LED 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a can be light-emitting and decorated. The three back front left band decoration portions 3127c can be independently luminescently decorated. Further, in the back front left decorative body base 3127, when the LED 3128i on the base of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is made to emit light, the logo decoration portion 3127d on the upper left of the base can be made to emit light.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 has a long flat plate shape in the vertical direction, and the plate surface is oriented in the left-right direction. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left reflector 3131. ing.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124, and has a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a provided below the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, and the back front left first decorative body 3128. It is located on the left side of the 3124 and is located on the left side of the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b provided above the partition decoration portion 3124a and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It is located to the left of the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c provided below the portion 3125c and the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and is provided above the partition decorative portion 3125c. A plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located on the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 and provided below the partition decorative portion 3126c, and the back front. A plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f, which are located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the left third decorative body 3126 and are provided above the partition decorative portion 3126c, are provided.

Further, the back front left decorative substrate 3128 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), and the back front of the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Three base lower LEDs 3128h located to the left of the left band decorative portion 3127c, and a plurality of bases located to the left of the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d in the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back front left decorative body base 3127. It is equipped with an upper LED 3128i.

When the plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are made to emit light. Can be done. When the plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the like of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light.

Further, when the plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

When a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted and displayed via the left diffusion lens 3134. When a plurality of (three) under-base LEDs 3128h of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be made to emit light. When the LEDs 3128i on the plurality of bases of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are made to emit light, the base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be made to emit light.

First lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base mounted on the right side of the back front left decorative substrate 3128. The LED 3128h and the LED 3128i on the base are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, the back front left decorative substrate 3128 can be made difficult to see, and the light from the mounted LED can be reflected. The first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo. The decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, the back front left sub decorative portion 3123, and the like can be brightly luminescently decorated. In addition, the back front left decorative board 3128 is made of ink with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) for characters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in addition to the LED.

The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and the plate surface is directed in the vertical direction. The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative plate portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative plate portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged above the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front upper left reflector 3132. ing.

Although not shown, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is composed of a plurality of first LEDs provided above the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. It includes a plurality of second LEDs provided above, and a plurality of third LEDs provided above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

When the plurality of first LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e and the like of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of second LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third LEDs of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the third upper left logo decoration portion 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

The plurality of first LEDs, second LEDs, and third LEDs mounted on the lower surface of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 can be made difficult to see, and the light from the mounted LED can be reflected, and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like can be brightly luminescent. Can be made to. In addition, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is ink with a color (for example, yellow) having high brightness and saturation for characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 in addition to the LED.

The front left lower left decorative substrate 3130 has a long flat plate shape on the left and right, and the plate surface is directed in the vertical direction. The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124, a back front left second decorative body 3125 decorative board portion 3125a, a back front left third decorative body 3126 decorative board portion 3126a, and a back front left decoration. It is arranged below the decorative plate portion 3127a of the body base 3127. The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the back front left decorative body base 3127 together with the back front left lower left decorative substrate 3133. ing.

The back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is provided below a plurality of first LEDs 3130a provided below the back front left first decorative body 3124 and below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125. A plurality of second LEDs 3130b and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c provided below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are provided.

When the plurality of first LEDs 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c and the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be made to emit light. it can. When the plurality of second LEDs 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the second back left logo decoration portion 3125d and the like of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be made to emit light. When the plurality of third LEDs 3130c of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 are made to emit light, the third back left logo decoration portion 3126d and the like of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

The plurality of first LEDs 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third LED 3130c mounted on the lower surface of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 are full-color LEDs.

The surface of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to make the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 difficult to see, and it is possible to reflect the light from the mounted LED, so that the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the like are brighter and luminescent. Can be made to. Further, on the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, the characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates to be mounted are inks of a color having high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). It is applied by screen printing using. This makes letters and symbols less noticeable. Further, although not shown, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, and the like are mounted on the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 in addition to the LED.

The left diffuser lens 3134 is arranged between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front left decorative substrate 3128 (back front left reflector 3131), and also includes the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127. It is sandwiched between. The left diffusing lens 3134 diffuses light from a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and irradiates the left side surface of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has the first front left logo decoration portion 3124c, the first back left logo decoration portion 3124d, and the back front left second decoration 3125 of the back front left first decoration 3124. The second back left logo decoration part 3125d and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d of the back front left third decoration body 3126 form one back front left logo decoration part 3121 by overlapping the front and back. Since the positions of the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are different in the front-rear direction, the game is played. When the position of a person's eyes moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, and a predetermined logo composed of a plurality of alphabets can be made to appear three-dimensional.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first lower LED 3128a, the second lower LED 3128c, the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting the LED 3130c, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are independently made. It can be light-emitting decorated, and the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 can be light-emitting decorated in various light-emitting modes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a first upper left logo decoration portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a second upper left logo decoration portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. , The third upper left logo decoration part 3126e of the back front left third decoration body 3126, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d of the back front left decoration base 3127 form one back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 by overlapping the front and back. doing. These, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different, so that the position of the player's eyes is different. As they move, the degree of overlap between them changes, and the logo with the letter "A" in a stylized form can be made to appear three-dimensional.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3120 has a first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, a second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, a third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and a base upper left logo decoration part 3127d, which are substantially the same position when viewed from the front. Even with a logo such as, by sequentially illuminating the back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127, the game is played. It is possible to show a pseudo animation with movement to a person, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player. In the light emitting effect like this animation, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are sequentially light-emitting and decorated. However, the same effect can be obtained.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the second upper LED 3128d, the third upper LED 3128f, the base upper LED 3128i, and the first LED and the second LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129. By appropriately emitting the LED and the third LED, the first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration part 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration part 3127d are independently emitted. It can be decorated, and the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a first left sub-decorative portion 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and a second left sub decorative portion 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125. , The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. Since the positions of the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f in the front-rear direction are different, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the degree of overlap thereof Will change, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 can be made to look three-dimensional.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes the first lower LED 3128a, the second lower LED 3128c, the third lower LED 3128e of the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third of the back front left lower decorative board 3130. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3130c, the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative portion 3126f can be independently emitted and decorated. The part 3123 can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 includes a back front left first decorative body 3124 partitioning decoration 3124a, a back front left second decorative body 3125 partitioning decoration 3125c, and a back front left third decorative body 3126 partitioning decoration. Since the 3126c is provided, the lower side (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left sub decoration part 3123) and the upper side (back) are separated from each other by the partition decoration part 3124a, the partition decoration part 3125c, and the partition decoration part 3126c. The light emitting decoration of the front left upper left logo decoration part 3122) can be clearly separated, and the decoration effect of the back front left logo decoration part 3121 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 and the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 Can be further enhanced. At this time, since the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c are also light-emitting decorated, the appearance of the partition decoration portion 3124a, the partition decoration portion 3125c, and the partition decoration portion 3126c can be improved and the light is emitted. You can entertain the decoration.

Further, when the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits light of the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130, the back front left first decorative body 3124 is divided and decorated. The penetrating decorative portion 3124b below the portion 3124a can be light-emitting decorated. Further, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are made to emit light, the penetrating decoration above the partition decoration portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is made to emit light. The part 3124b can be decorated with light emission. The appearance can also be improved by the light emitting decoration of the penetrating decoration portion 3124b.

Further, the back front left decorative unit 3120 emits light of 3128 g of the light guide plate LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, so that the back front right first decorative substrate 3148 and the back front right second decorative substrate in the back front right decorative unit 3140 are emitted. The first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 can be emitted and displayed in cooperation with the 3149 and the LED for the light guide plate of the decorative substrate 3150 for the front right light guide plate.

In this way, according to the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, and the like are transparent three-dimensional decorations. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes, the player is bored with various light-emitting effects. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the above, the partitioning decorative portion 3124a, the partitioning decorative portion 3125c, and the partitioning decorative portion 3126c that block the light from the LED are shown as penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the groove shape is used. , LED, may be used. Further, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is provided with a protrusion to be inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124 so that the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. You may. That is, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as the positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decoration unit]
The back front right decoration unit 3140 in the back front production unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and is a long back front right logo composed of a plurality of alphabetic character strings. Decorative part 3141 and back front right logo Decorative part 3142 (see Fig. 151 (b)), which is provided above the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and is a design of the letter "A", and the back front right logo. It has a back front right sub-decorative portion (not shown) provided in the vicinity of the decorative portion 3141.

The back front right decoration unit 3140 has a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 having a long front view shape vertically, and a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 provided behind the back front right first decorative body 3144. The decorative body 3145, the transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 provided behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the transparent back provided behind the back front right third decorative body 3146. It is equipped with a front right decorative base 3147 (see FIG. 152).

The right end portion of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion of the back front right decorative body base 3147, and the upper right end portion of the upper end of the unit base 3178 in the back front lower effect unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion. In addition, the back front right decorative body base 3147 extends up and down at a constant height over the entire width near the center in the vertical direction, and is provided with three back front right band decorations at intervals. It has a portion 3147a (see FIG. 151 (b)).

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 is used to illuminate the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part. The right first decorative substrate 3148, the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for emitting and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142. It includes a back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for luminescent decoration and a back front right lower right decorative substrate 3152 for luminescent decoration of the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 (see FIG. 156).

Further, the back front right decorative unit 3140 is located between the upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right first decorative substrate 3148, and between the light guide plate 3110 and the back front right second decorative substrate 3149. The right middle diffusing lens 3154 provided in the above, and the lower right diffusing lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the decorative substrate 3150 for the back front right light guide plate are provided (see FIG. 156). .. The upper right diffusing lens 3153, the right middle diffusing lens 3154, and the lower right diffusing lens 3155 are provided between the back front right third decorative body 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3140 receives the game ball B which is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and is guided backward by the first guidance passage 2701, and is guided downward by the first back guidance passage. It is provided with 3156 and a second back guidance passage 3157 that receives the game ball B that is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and is guided backward by the second guidance passage and guides it downward. .. A general winning opening sensor 3001 is provided in the first back guidance passage 3156. The game ball B guided to the first back guide passage 3156 and the second back guide passage 3157 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

Further, in the back front right decoration unit 3140, the game ball B received by the accessory winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided backward by the guidance passage 2613 is distributed, and the V winning opening 2007 and the losing opening 2008 are opened. The distribution passage provided, the V prize opening door 3006 that advances and retreats in the distribution passage and distributes the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to either the V winning opening 2007 or the loss opening 2008, and The V distribution solenoid 3007 that advances and retreats the V winning opening door 3006, the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007, and the loss that detects the game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008. It is equipped with a mouth sensor 3004. The game ball B detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and the losing opening sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 via the back front lower effect unit 3160.

The configuration of the back front right logo decoration unit 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub decoration unit, etc. in the back front right decoration unit 3140 is the same as that of the back front left decoration unit 3120. Omit.

Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 have a back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and a back front upper right. It has a partition decoration portion 3144a extending to the left and right and penetrating back and forth between the logo decoration portion 3142 and the logo decoration portion 3142. With this partition decoration portion 3144a, the back front right logo decoration portion 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144 has a plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b penetrating the front and rear. These plurality of penetrating decorative portions 3144b can exert the same effect as the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the back front left first decorative body 3124.

Thus, according to the back front right decoration unit 3140, like the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right logo decoration unit 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142, the back front right sub decoration part, and the like. The transparent three-dimensional decoration can improve the appearance in the game area 5a, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

In addition, since the back front right logo decoration part 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the back front right sub decoration part can be light-emitting and decorated in various light-emitting modes, it is difficult for the player to get bored with various light-emitting effects. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the back front right logo decoration part 3141 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 which are substantially the same position when viewed from the front, the back front right first decorative body 3144, the back front right second decorative body 3145, and the back front right first By sequentially emitting and decorating the three decorative bodies 3146 and the back front right decorative body base 3147, it is possible to show the player a pseudo animation with movement, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front and bottom production unit]
The back front lower middle decoration unit 3160 in the back front lower middle decoration unit 3100 includes a disk-shaped back front lower middle decoration body 3161 and a back front lower middle decoration body 3161 in which the characters "SPIN" are given to the upper part in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a back front lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back front lower elevating drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back front lower middle decoration body 3161. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161 has translucency.

Further, the back front lower left inner decoration unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, and has a disk-shaped back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 and a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 of the same size. The disc-shaped back front lower left outer decoration 3164 and the back front lower middle decoration 3161, which are provided on the left side and have the same size, are provided on the right side of the disc-shaped back front lower right inner decoration of the same size. It includes a body 3165 and a disk-shaped back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 provided on the right side of the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and having the same size. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 have translucency.

Further, the back front lower production unit 3160 is provided on the left side of the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and includes the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 with the characters "Queen". The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 has translucency.

Further, the back front lower left effect unit 3160 has a back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for emitting and decorating the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 for emitting and decorating the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163. Interior decoration substrate 3169, back front lower left outer decoration 3164 for light emission decoration, back front lower left outer decoration substrate 3170, back front lower right inner decoration 3165 for light emission decoration, back front lower right inner decoration The substrate 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for luminescent decoration of the back front lower right logo decorative body 3167, and the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3173. (See FIG. 156 (b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo decoration The substrate 3173 includes a back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, a back front lower right outer decoration body 3166, and a back front. It is provided behind the lower logo decoration body 3167.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 3173, and the surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). With this white solder resist, it is possible to reflect light from the LED or from the front, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the decorative bodies provided in front of each.

In addition, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, back front lower logo On the decorative substrate 3173, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LEDs to be mounted and other decorative substrates are screen-printed using ink of a highly bright or saturated color (for example, yellow). Is given by. As a result, characters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be surely exhibited.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 are top view type LEDs. On the other hand, it is mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decoration board 3173. The plurality of LEDs are side view type LEDs.

Further, in these decorative substrates, members other than LEDs that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface) so as not to interfere with the light emission decoration. There is.

Back front lower middle decoration 3161, back front lower left inner decoration 3163, back front lower left outer decoration 3164, back front lower right inner decoration 3165, back front lower right outer decoration 3166, back front lower logo decoration As shown in FIG. 156, the 3167 is located above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 from the upper end. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is invisible from the player side (front). In addition, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 are the upper ends of each. However, as shown in FIG. 160, the light guide plate 3110 is located below the lower end of the second pattern 3112, and is left and right at intervals corresponding to each line group 3114 constituting the second pattern 3112. Arranged in the direction.

More specifically, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is in the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163 is in the second line group 3114b, and the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164 is in the first line group 3114a. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 is provided corresponding to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 is provided corresponding to the fifth line group 3114e, respectively. Therefore, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 are emitted (upper end). When only the part is made to emit light or the whole is made to emit light), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is as if the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, The light from the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 can make the player feel as if the light is displayed, and the pachinko machine can produce a light emitting effect that has never been seen before. Can be shown to others.

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168, a back front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, a back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, a back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, and a back front lower right outer. The decorative substrate 3172 and the back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 are provided behind the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower for displaying (light emitting decoration) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. A right decorative substrate 3175 is provided (see FIG. 156 (a)).

The light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 each have five LED groups 3177 composed of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the order of the first LED 3176a, the second LED 3176b, the third LED 3176c, the fourth LED 3176d, and the fifth LED 3176e from the right. Further, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and from the left, the first LED group 3177a, the second LED group 3177b, the third LED group 3177c, and the fourth. The LED group 3177d and the fifth LED group 3177e are arranged in this order.

The LEDs 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 of the light guide plate. The LEDs 3176 of the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right decorative substrate 3175 under the light guide plate.

The plurality of LEDs 3176 mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are side view type full-color LEDs. The surface of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). The decorative substrate 3175 on the lower right side of the light guide plate is made inconspicuous. Further, on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, characters and symbols for avoiding confusion with electronic components such as LED3176 and other decorative substrates to be mounted are of brightness and saturation. It is applied by screen printing with a high color (eg, yellow) ink. As a result, characters and symbols can be made inconspicuous through the decorative body provided in the front, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be surely exhibited.

In the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, when the first LED 3176a is made to emit light in each LED group 3177, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is emitted. Can be displayed (light emitting decoration). Further, when the second LED 3176b is made to emit light, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the third LED 3176c is made to emit light, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the fourth LED 3176d is made to emit light, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration). Further, when the fifth LED 3176e is made to emit light, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light (emission decoration).

As a result, each of the plurality of lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be independently displayed with light emission (light emission decoration), and various light emission effects can be shown to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the back front lower production unit 3160 includes a back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and a back front lower right outer. Decorative body 3166, back front lower logo decoration body 3167, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower It supports the right outer decorative substrate 3172, the back front lower logo decorative substrate 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, and the like, and is provided with a flat plate-shaped unit base 3178 that is long to the left and right. .. The lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decoration unit 3140 are attached to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 receives the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges the game ball B to the lower substrate holder 1200, and the first discharge passage 3181 and the starting port unit 2100. The second discharge passage 3182 that receives the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 and discharges it to the lower substrate holder 1200, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400 are received. A third discharge passage 3183 that discharges to the lower board holder 1200, and a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the lower board holder 1200. , A fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges it to the lower substrate holder 1200.

The first discharge passage 3181 is provided with three delivery ports so as to correspond to the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning opening sensors 3001 are provided so as to correspond to the respective delivery ports. Has been done. Further, the first starting port sensor 3002 is provided in the second discharge passage 3182.

The back front lower production unit 3160 has a back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, a back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, a back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and a back front lower right outer decoration. The body 3166 and the back front lower logo decoration body 3167 can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a to improve the appearance, and by illuminating them, the player can be entertained by the luminescence effect. it can. Further, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back front lower rotation drive motor, and can be moved up and down by the back front lower lift drive motor 3162, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect. ..

Further, the back front lower effect unit 3160 can emit and display the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by the plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175. It is possible to entertain the player with the light emission effect by 3112.

[5-9b. Back and back production unit]
Next, the back-back-upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 149. The back-back-upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear upper part of the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back-rear upper effect unit 3200 has a back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right and can be raised and lowered, and a back-front left decorative body 3120. A back-back left side decoration 3220 having three back-back left-band decorations 3221 extending in the front-rear direction and a back-front right so as to follow the three back-front left-band decorations 3127c in the base 3127. Back front right of the decoration unit 3140 Back back right having three back front right band decoration parts 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to follow the three back front right band decoration parts 3147a in the decoration body base 3147. It includes a side decoration body 3230 (see FIG. 131).

The back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided on the back side of the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 (see FIG. 129 and the like) in which five 7-segment display portions are arranged side by side and the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211. It has a back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 (see FIG. 162) in which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

In the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is capable of emitting light independently for each of the five 7-segment display units, and various characters and numbers can be obtained by combining each segment. Pictures, etc. can be displayed. As a result, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are expected to be "big hits". Can be displayed. Further, in the second decorative portion 3212 on the back and back, each character can emit light independently.

In the normal state, the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in the ascending position with the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 facing forward. The back-back upper movable decorative body 3210 is arranged according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, or V. Depending on the acceptance (distribution) of the game ball B to the winning opening 2007, it rotates 180 degrees around the axis extending to the left and right to turn the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 forward, or descend from the ascending position. Move to a position (see FIGS. 161 and 162).

According to this back-back upper movable decorative body 3210, by rotating and moving up and down, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

The three back-back left band decorations 3221 of the back-back left side decoration 3220 are the three back-front left-band decorations 3127c extending to the left and right in the back-front left decoration base 3127 of the back-front left decoration unit 3120. It is provided so as to extend backward from the right end of each. The back rear left band decorative portion 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

The three back-back right band decorations 3231 of the back-back right side decoration 3230 are the three back-front right band decorations 3147a extending to the left and right in the back-front right decoration base 3147 of the back-front right decoration unit 3140. It is provided so as to extend backward from the right end of each. The back rear right band decorative portion 3231 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light so that light flows in the front-rear direction.

[5-9c. Back and bottom production unit]
Next, the back rear lower effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to 135 and the like. The back rear lower effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached below the back rear upper effect unit 3200 at the lower part behind the back front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010.

In the back-rear lower production unit 3300, the back-rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back are supported so that the base end sides adjacent to each other on the left and right are rotatably supported around the axis in the front-rear direction and are supported so as to be raised and lowered. It has a rear right movable decorative body 3302. The back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are formed so as to rotate in opposite directions as the base end side moves up and down.

Under normal conditions, the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back-rear right movable decoration body 3302 are rotated in a direction in which their tip sides are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the back-front effect unit 3100 and forward (game). The evacuation position is invisible from the person's side) (see FIG. 129 and the like).

The back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The right side of the back-rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the left side of the back-back right movable decoration body 3302 hit each other. It comes into contact with it. As a result, the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are integrated to form one large decorative body, and the appearance position is visible from the front (see FIG. 163). ).

As a result, a large decorative body with the letter "A" in the design appears in the center of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302, which can surprise the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making people think that there is something good. The back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the appearance is improved by luminescent decoration by the plurality of LEDs. At the same time, it can attract the attention of the player.

As shown in FIG. 167, the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 are positioned so as to overlap the rear of the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 in the state of the appearance position. As a result, a large decorative body consisting of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can be luminescently decorated by the first pattern 3111. The three-dimensional decoration by the body 3302 and the light-emitting display on the plane by the first pattern 3111 can show the player a deep decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player and attract the interest of the player. It can be strongly attracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 168 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back rear upper first decorative portion of the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper effect unit of the back unit is moved to a descending position with the back rear upper first decorative portion facing forward. .. FIG. 162 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back rear upper movable decorative body in the back rear upper effect unit of the back unit is moved to a descending position and the back rear upper second decorative portion is directed forward. .. FIG. 163 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back rear left movable decorative body and the back rear right movable decorative body in the back rear lower effect unit of the back unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 164 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back front lower middle decorative body in the back front lower effect unit of the back front effect unit of the back unit is raised.

FIG. 165 shows the back front left logo decoration part, the back front upper left logo decoration part, the back front left sub decoration part, and the back front left band decoration part of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front production unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made it made. FIG. 166 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated. In FIG. 167, the first pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is luminescent and decorated, and the back rear left movable decoration and the back rear right movable decoration in the back rear lower effect unit are moved to the appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate in the back front effect unit of the back unit is light-emittingly decorated.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. The upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed to be substantially transparent as a whole. , As shown in FIG. 134, through them, the back front left decoration unit 3120, the back front right decoration unit 3140, and the back front lower production unit of the back front production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. 3160 back front lower middle decoration body 3161, back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, back front lower right outer decoration body 3166, back front lower logo The decorative body 3167, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the back rear left side decorative body 3220, the back rear right side decorative body 3230, etc. of the Unit 3200 can be clearly seen, and the center accessory. Through the frame of 2500, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized satisfactorily.

More specifically, the back front left first decorative body 3124 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 are located near the left side of the center accessory 2500, and about half of them are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. .. Further, the back front right first decorative body 3144 and the like of the back front right decoration unit 3140 are located near the right side portion of the center accessory 2500, and a part of the back front right decoration unit 3140 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower effect unit 3160 extends to the left and right at the lower part of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of the back front lower effect unit 3160 is good through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized.

Further, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 of the back front lower production unit 3160 is located above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the lower side of the center accessory 2500. The upper part of the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decoration body 3166 is a center accessory. It is located within the frame of 2500. The back front lower logo decoration body 3167 is located in the lower left corner of the game area 5a outside the center accessory 2500.

Further, since the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 of the back-back-up effect unit 3200 is located in the ascending position, it extends to the left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is transparent. It can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and a part of it can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 faces the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 having a plurality of 7-segment portions forward.

The back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 are in the state of the rear retracted position of the back front lower effect unit 3160, and can be visually recognized from the front (player side). It is impossible.

In the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is produced according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100, the back rear upper effect unit 3200, the back rear lower effect unit 3300, and the like perform predetermined movable effects and light emission effects.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back-back-up movable decorative body 3210 of the back-back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, it has five 7-segment portions. With the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 facing forward, the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the ascending position to the descending position. As a result, most of the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be visually recognized in a good state. At this time, by variablely displaying the five 7-segment parts of the back-back upper first decorative part 3211, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the desired numbers and patterns can be displayed on the five 7-segment parts. Depending on whether or not it is displayed, the player can be thrilled.

Further, as an effect using the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, after moving the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 to the descending position while facing the front, as described above. In addition, the second decorative portion 3212 on the back rear upper having a plurality of character strings is directed forward by rotating 180 degrees around the axis in the left-right direction. As a result, since the characters of "JACKPOT" face forward, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a "big hit", and the expectation for an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" gaming state) in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as an effect using the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around an axis in the left-right direction, the back rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are intermediate. Either the back-rear upper first decorative portion 3211 or the back-rear upper second decorative portion 3212 may be stopped rotating forward by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation at the site. As a result, depending on whether or not the "JACKPOT" of the second decorative part 3212 on the back and back faces forward, the player can be thrilled and excited, raising the player's expectation and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, as an effect using the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, while the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 is used, the back / rear / upper second decorative portion 3212 is directed forward by rotating 180 degrees around the axis in the left-right direction. You may do so.

Further, as an effect using the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. From the state of the retracted position where they are located, on the base end side of each, rotate and raise each other in opposite directions around the axis extending back and forth so that the tips of each rise and touch each other. Is moved to the appearance position where the abutment is made. As a result, one large decorative body in which the letter "A" is designed in the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 is displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the game area 5a. Since it will appear in the center of the game, it can surprise the player greatly, attract the attention of the player strongly, and I think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as an effect using the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 in the back front lower effect unit 3160 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Or rotate it. As a result, in the lower part of the center in the game area 5a, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rotates, so that the player can be made to think that there is something good, and a feeling of expectation for the game. Can be increased. Further, since the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 is provided directly above the first starting port 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 can be rotated or moved up and down to play a game. It is possible to urge a person to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002, and to enjoy the original game ball B driving operation of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, as an effect using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate are used. By appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the 3130, the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, the back front left band decoration part 3127c, etc. are emitted. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect to decorate. For example, in the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the first front left logo decoration part 3124c, the first back left logo decoration part 3124d, the second back left logo decoration part 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration part 3126d are arranged in this order. By decorating with light emission, it is possible to show a light emission effect like a neon sign flowing back and forth, which can entertain the player.

Although not shown, the back front right decoration unit 3140 can also perform the same light emission effect as the back front left decoration unit 3120, and can entertain the player.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3128 g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back The back front right first decorative substrate 3148, the back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150's plurality of light guide plate LEDs in the front right decorative unit 3140 are made to emit light, and the first pattern is emitted. The 3111 is displayed by light emission (light emission decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111 in which the letter "A" is stylized is displayed in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the first pattern 3111 is displayed by light emission, and the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 are movable. The decorative body 3302 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the first pattern 3111 and the large decorative body formed by the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to raise the expectation for.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, a plurality of LEDs 3176 of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the back front lower effect unit 3160 are appropriately emitted. The second pattern 3112 is light-emitting and displayed (light-emitting decoration). As a result, the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165, and the back front lower right outer in the back front lower right inner decoration unit 3160. Since a plurality of lines 3113 extending upward from the upper part of the five decorative bodies of the decorative body 3166 are displayed in light emission, the player can perform a light emission effect like a searchlight from below on the concert stage. It can be shown, and the inside of the game area 5a can be shown gorgeously to entertain the player.

Further, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in FIG. 168, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the back front in the back front lower effect unit 3160 in a state where the second pattern 3112 is light-emittingly displayed. The upper end or the whole of the lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 may be luminescently decorated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the line group 3114 displayed by light emission in the second pattern 3112 may be light-emittingly decorated. As a result, the line 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 becomes the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, the back front lower left outer decoration body 3164, and the back front lower right inner decoration body 3165. , Back front, lower right, outer decoration 3166, etc. It is possible to make the player illusion that the light is emitted by the light from the decoration, and it is possible to show the player an unprecedented light emission effect and entertain. it can.

Further, although not shown, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be displayed by light emission, and the back / rear / upper movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to the descending position. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the back-rear upper movable decoration 3210 is illuminated by a searchlight from below, so that the back-rear upper movable decoration 3210 can be made to look gorgeous and entertaining. it can.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emitting effect and the movable effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the display effect, and the like, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, the RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error, and the game board 5 are divided. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. Large winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B that is detected in the winning opening sensor 2402, the character winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B that is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and the V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B that is received in the V winning opening 2007. , The loss opening sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the loss opening 2008, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B ejected from the game board 5, and the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. , And the detection signal from the vibration sensor, etc. that detects the vibration acting on the game board 5, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are, they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor, respectively. The detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , The accessory winning port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, each drive signal is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the function display unit. 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, ordinary hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, Each drive signal is output to, without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby outputting various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is reversed when the launch is not permitted. Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the V winning opening sensor 3003, the loss opening sensor 3004, The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor The detection of the game ball B by 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2402 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2402 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is frequently detected by the out sensor 664. Occurs in. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance. A ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball removal operation. , Is equipped.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the power failure of the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that the solenoids are electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 195. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration of the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is omitted, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are mounted on one semiconductor chip. The integrated peripheral control IC, the peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, the sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and the sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by this sound source IC. It has a stored sound ROM.

A plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip in the peripheral control IC, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripherals are based on the various commands. The CPU of the control IC outputs the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and serial I / O for the lamp drive board. For the game board decorative drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or drive signals to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, and the like. It is composed of door-side drive data for outputting the data, and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed serial for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting data from the I / O port to the effect display control unit 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevating detection sensor 374, and the sudden output detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on this operation signal. The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and provides the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the like provided in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. , The main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjusting switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, etc.) as sound information. By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the effect display device 1600 is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137, 144, 145 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "time reduction (time reduction)" is performed.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of obstacle nails discharged above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003. After contacting N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance opened at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. It is composed of the second guide passage 2522 and the second guide passage. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). If the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit 2400 The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B passing through the gate 2003 and the left side of the gate 2003 has a high probability of hitting the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2022. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted in the second sub-out opening 2022, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the accessory winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the large winning opening 2005.

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the accessory winning opening 2006, and the second starting opening of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted in 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, and it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2022 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to urge a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2022. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of accepting the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2022 than the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006, it is possible to promote a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "per character", the character wins. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received by the accessory winning mouth 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game balls B (pieces) are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B received by the accessory winning opening 2006 and detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2601 circulates in the distribution passage 3158, and is moved back and forth through the V winning opening door 3006. It is distributed to any of. When the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2007, the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the loss opening 2008, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player does not occur.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the accessory winning opening 2006 has the first shelf portion 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf portion 2422, and the upper part is on the left side. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf part 2423, the grand prize opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf part 2424 are rolled to the left and released into the game area 5a. ..

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2411, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door 2411 When is retracted, the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "time reduction (time reduction)" is performed.

In addition, a special lottery result (first special) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B is rolling on the large winning opening door 2413. When the lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, after the special fluctuation time elapses, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. Is ready to be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "feature hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. The special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that the game ball B is at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results that are drawn by acceptance include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time)". There are "shortening) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "per character", the character winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", the big winning opening 2005 makes it possible to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special time) is set as an advantageous game state. ) Is generated. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the pattern sequence in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back front effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the rear upper effect unit 3200, the back rear lower effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 170 (b) is an enlarged part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same part as (a). It is a front view shown by. FIG. 171 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the back front left decoration unit of the back front effect unit is light-emitting decorated in (a). It is explanatory drawing shown by. FIG. 172 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the panel plate of the game panel is light-emittingly decorated in FIG. 171 (a).

The game board 5A of the second embodiment is the game board 5A of the first embodiment, except that the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a milky white synthetic resin having translucency. It has the same configuration as the above, and detailed description of the parts having the same configuration will be omitted.

In the game board 5 of the first embodiment, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) are made of transparent synthetic resin, as shown in FIG. 170 (a). The back unit 3000 provided behind the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front (player side).

On the other hand, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, since the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed of the milky white synthetic resin, as shown in FIG. 170 (b) and the like, the front component 1000 and the panel plate 1110A The portion of the back unit 3000 or the like provided behind the game panel 1100 except for the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A cannot be visually recognized from the front (player side).

The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are made of a translucent milky white opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be a milky white synthetic resin plate cut and molded, or may be molded by injection molding using a milky white synthetic resin.

In the game board 5A of the present embodiment, since the panel board 1110A and the like of the game panel 1100 are milky white, a part of the back unit 3000 provided behind through the panel board 1110A and the like (from the opening 1112 in the front view). The outer part) can be made invisible. Since the panel plate 1110A and the like have translucency, when the decorative body and the like provided at the rear are light-emitting and decorated, the light from the rear decorative body is transmitted through the panel plate 1110A and the decorative body is subjected to light emission decoration. The luminous decoration can be visually recognized by the player.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), in the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110A and the like, the panel plate 1110A is viewed from the front. The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc., which are located outside the opening 1112, are invisible from the front. Then, when the back front left logo decoration portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like were light-emitting decorated, they had translucency as shown in FIG. 171 (b). The back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123, which are provided behind through the panel plate 1110A, transmit light and are light-emitting decorated, such as the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration. The part 3123 and the like can be visually recognized.

Since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white, the luminescent colors of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123, which are luminescent and decorated, can be transmitted as they are, and the colors can be changed. It is possible to show the player a rich light emission effect.

As the opacity having translucency in the panel plate 1110A, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it becomes difficult to illuminate and decorate with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it becomes difficult to obtain it as an opaque material. Further, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of the member provided at the rear are easily recognized, and there is a possibility that the effect of concealment cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Further, although the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2 / 0.5)), "white Munsell value (N 9.5)" and "munsell color Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2)" are used. /0.5) ”,“ Unflower color Munsell value (10Y 9/1) ”,“ Generated color Munsell value (10YR 9/1) ”,“ Lead white Munsell value (N 9) ”,“ Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5 / 0.3) ”,“ Gray-white Munsell value (10YR 9 / 0.5) ”,“ White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2 / 1.3) ”,“ Secret color Munsell Value (2B 8.5 / 2) ”,“ Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5 / 1.5) ”,“ Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5 / 3.5) ”,“ Sakura color Munsell A white color such as "value (10RP 9 / 2.5)" may be used.

By the way, since the panel plate 1110A and the like are milky white having translucency, if a colored decorative body such as black, red, or blue is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body emits light. Even in the undecorated state, it may be visible through the panel plate 1110A depending on the color of the decorative body. Then, when the decorative body is seen through the panel board 1110A, the player notices the existence of the decorative body behind the panel board 1110A, and the impact (surprise) given to the player when the decorative body is luminescent and decorated is given. There is a risk that it will be lowered and the desired effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back front left decorative unit 3120 provided behind the panel plate 1110A constitutes the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, the back front left sub decoration portion 3123, and the like. Since the left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127 are formed of colorless and transparent members, they are transparent. Through the milky white panel plate 1110A, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front left sub decoration part 3123 cannot be seen. Therefore, in a state where the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc. are not light-emittingly decorated, they cannot be seen by the player, so that it is difficult for the player to notice their existence. .. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, etc. are light-emittingly decorated, they can be seen through the translucent milky white panel plate 1110A, which surprises the player. It is possible to enjoy the light emission effect, and the light of the light emission decoration can be seen through the panel plate 1110A, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be made to look bright and beautiful, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. ..

Further, the game board 5A of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of LEDs 1130a that irradiate the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A with light are mounted on the outside of the milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency. Has been done. The plurality of LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are made to emit light, the panel plate 1110A can be made to emit light and be decorated as shown by shading in FIG. 172. As a result, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) through which the game ball B circulates is in a state of self-lighting, so that the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened and the game area 5a is circulated. The game ball B can be made easy to see, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the game panel 1100 self-illuminates, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be seen as a silhouette, so that the game ball B can be easily visually recognized, and the firing intensity is finely adjusted. It can be easy. Further, if the panel decorative board 1130 is provided on both the left side and the right side of the panel board 1110A, it can be intuitively understood when giving the player "right-handed" or "left-handed" advice. become. More specifically, depending on the situation of the game, the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 on either the left side or the right side is made to emit light, and the left part or the right part of the panel plate 1110A is made to emit light to decorate the player. You can intuitively understand that you are giving advice on "left-handed" and "right-handed", and you can entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B. It is possible to entertain the player with a new sense of light emission.

More specifically, in a conventional pachinko machine, in a game board using an opaque veneer plywood as a game panel, a decorative film having a predetermined pattern printed on the front surface of the plywood is attached to the inside of the game area. I try to decorate it. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decoration with the decorative film does not look like other game machines, and it is difficult to enhance the appeal to the player. On the other hand, when the panel plate 1110 through which the game ball B circulates is made transparent as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the back unit 3000 provided in the rear and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. While the pachinko machine 1 can be easily seen and has a feeling of openness, the game ball B circulating in front of the transparent panel plate 1110 appears to be floating in the air, and depending on the player, the game ball. The movement of B may be difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the gaming board 5A of the present embodiment, since the panel plate 1110A having translucency can be light-emitting and decorated by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the light-emitting color and the light-emitting pattern of the LED 1130a and the like By appropriately combining the above, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed in various ways, and the self-luminous game board 5A, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can be shown to the player, and the player is interested in it. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be strongly attracted and has a high appeal to the player. Further, since the panel plate 1110A is self-luminous by the plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the game ball B circulating in front of the panel plate 1110A can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

According to the game board 5A of the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned effects and effects, the panel plate 1110A and the like are made of a milky white synthetic resin, and it is sufficient to use a resin having a lower grade than the transparent resin, so that it is transparent. Compared with the case where the resin is used, the cost required for the panel plate 1110A can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided on the outside of the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A. You can do it. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, as compared with the case where the panel plate is made transparent, the point-shaped light from the LED 1130a or the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the opalescent milky white panel plate 1110A, so that the panel plate 1110A Can be softly luminescent and decorated, and a game board 5A that is easy on the eyes can be obtained by suppressing glare.

Further, in the game board 5A of the present embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also referred to as a cell) having a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wear of the panel plate 1110A due to the distribution of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the game area 5a when the rear decorative body is not luminescent and decorated by the cell pattern. Can be improved. Further, the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110A can illuminate and decorate the cell pattern together with the panel plate 1110A, so that the decoration of the panel plate 1110A can be made to look more beautiful.

Further, as described above, when the cell is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the pattern on the cell is used as the outline, and the light emitting decoration by the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110A ( Illuminations) can be made clear, and the decorative effect of light emitting decoration can be further enhanced.

Further, a cell may be provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. As a result, the shadow of the cell (or the pattern applied to the cell) is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light from the LED or the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A (cell), so that the LED emits light. Therefore, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be changed, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. The shadow reflected on the panel board 1110A may be, for example, characters such as "right-handed", "left-handed", "chance", etc., and entertains the player by suggesting a change in the game situation. Can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (back front left decorative unit 3120) having a fixed position is provided behind the milky white panel plate 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may be provided behind the panel plate 1110A so as to be movable between the retracted position behind the panel plate 1110A and the appearance position inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A in the front view.

Further, in the above embodiment, the whole including the inside of the panel plate 1110A or the like is shown to be milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A or the like is not limited to this, and is partially milky white or has a transparent inside and at least one surface. May be milky white. Specifically, for example, on at least one surface of a panel plate formed of two colors of a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel plate in which a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate are bonded together, and a transparent resin plate. Panel boards with a milky white film (cell) attached, panel boards with a transparent resin board that has been subjected to chijimi processing with ultraviolet curable ink, and panel boards that have been sandblasted on the back surface of a transparent resin board. Be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A or the like is shown to be milky white, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a panel plate having an appropriate color such as red, blue, yellow, etc. may be used. good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown to be milky white having translucency, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front is transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment. It may be a constituent member 1000, or it may be a front constituent member having a color different from that of the panel plate 1110A.

[9. Third Embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of the third embodiment when the panel plate and the cell are disassembled and viewed from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same structure except that the cell 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110 in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and the parts having the same structure will be described in detail. Is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the second embodiment, a film-shaped cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is detachably provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100. .. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and a predetermined pattern is printed on the cell 1140. The material of the cell 1140 is "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", "polyethylene resin". , "Polystyrene resin", "Impact resistant polystyrene resin", "Polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The cell 1140 is formed in a size that covers only a part (here, a portion extending from the left side to the lower side of the center accessory 2500) with respect to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110. Although not shown, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with screws in a state of having a predetermined amount of rattling. As a result, as compared with the case where the panel plate 1110 is attached to the entire surface, the labor required for attaching the cell 1140 can be facilitated, and the amount of the cell 1140 used can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided in a part of the panel plate 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be taken from the resin sheet can be increased as compared with the conventional cell attached to the panel plate, and the pachinko machine can be used. The cost of 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state of rattling, even if the cell 1140 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction with the panel plate 1110 can be absorbed by the rattling. it can. As a result, even if the cell 1140 contracts with respect to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to prevent wrinkles and cracks from forming in the cell 1140, and it is possible to maintain the decorative effect of the pattern of the cell 1140. ..

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with a cell 1140 having a different pattern, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed and the model can be changed. It is possible to easily respond to changes or design changes, etc., it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and by replacing it with a cell 1140 with a pattern with a higher decorative effect, the game is played. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a person.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel plate 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is longer than in the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the front side of the panel plate 1110, and the game is played. It is possible to reduce the feeling of oppression on the person.

Further, it is desirable that the cell 1140 has translucency, and the pattern of the cell 1140 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED provided behind the panel plate 1110 (cell 1140). The appearance in the area 5a can be improved, and the light emitting decoration of the cell 1140 can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using a screw, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the cell 1140 is described as a panel plate 1110 and a panel holder 1120. It may be installed by sandwiching it between.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 provided with the center accessory 2500 of the panel plate 1110 is provided at a position offset (eccentric to the upper right) in the upper right direction with respect to the panel plate 1110. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be offset upward (eccentric upward) or offset laterally (eccentric left-right). It is preferable that the cell 1140 is provided behind the portion where the opening 1112 is offset (eccentric) to widen, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the opening 1112 provided with the center accessory 2500 may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), or may be offset with respect to the center or the outer edge of the game area 5a. good. Therefore, for example, when the centers of the panel plate 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide with each other, even if the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the panel plate 1110 coincides with the center of the game area 5a. Alternatively, the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel plate 1110.

[10. Another embodiment of the function display unit]
Subsequently, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 or the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179 and the like. 174 (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a), and (c) is in front of the function display unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the rear, and FIG. 1D is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) seen from behind. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 174 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 174 and the player. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

Similar to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment is variablely displayed by blinking a plurality of LEDs 1401 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Later, by turning on or off each of them so as to have a predetermined combination, the game state (game status), the normal lottery result, the special lottery result (first special lottery result, the second special lottery result), and the normal lottery result. The number of holdings, the number of holdings of special lottery results, the number of rounds at the time of "big hit", etc. are displayed.

More specifically, in the game board 5 and the like of the first embodiment, for example, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 and the like, the main control board 1310 has a special lottery result as an internal process. Is drawn. Then, the main control board 1310 transmits a control signal for displaying the lottery special lottery result to the function display unit 1400, and displays the lottery special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401 in the function display unit 1400. I am trying to do it.

Further, the control signal of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect suggesting the special lottery result. Is displayed. Since the production image displayed on the production display device 1600 focuses on entertaining the player, it is difficult to understand the details of the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310, although it can be roughly recognized. It has become. On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400, the lottery special lottery result is accurately displayed, but since it is displayed by the light emission of a plurality of small LEDs 1401, the displayed contents can be understood at a glance. It is difficult.

Therefore, by taking a picture of the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera (digital camera), a camera attached to the mobile phone, etc., the light emitting state of the LED in the function display unit 1400 is analyzed, and the contents displayed on the function display unit 1400. It is conceivable to try to know as soon as possible.

However, when the special lottery result of the lottery can be easily determined by the light emission of the LED in the function display unit 1400, the effect display indicates that the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is "missing". Even if the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the device 1600, knowing the result makes it impossible to enjoy the effect by the effect image and hopes that the effect image will end sooner. , There is a risk that some players may become frustrated and lose their interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, the light emitting status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen by the eyes of the player, but when the image is taken with a digital camera or the like, the light emitting status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be seen. It became unclear so that the displayed content could not be determined.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A is provided on the front side of the function display board 1402 in which a plurality of LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front surface and the function display board 1402, and independently transmits the light from the LEDs 1401 to the front. Light from the translucent sheet 1404 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1403, the translucent sheet 1404 provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1403, and the LED 1401 provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1404 and transmitted through the reflector rear 1403. It is equipped with a reflector front 1405 that radiates light in different directions.

As shown in FIG. 175, a plurality of LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the function display board 1402. The reflector rear 1403 is provided with a plurality of through holes 1403a so as to correspond to each LED 1401 of the function display board 1402. The plurality of through holes 1403a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1402 (see FIG. 174 (b) and the like).

The front reflector 1405 has a plurality of display holes 1405a that correspond to the through holes 1403a of the reflector rear 1403 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plurality of display holes 1405a are located immediately before the through holes 1403a of the reflector rear 1403 corresponding to each rear end side, and the front end side passes through the center of the rear end side from the front vertical line of the function display board 1402. It is located at a distance from each other. That is, the axial direction of the plurality of display holes 1405a is directed to each direction with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the function display board 1402.

Further, the reflector front 1405 has a distinguishing recess 1405b which is recessed from the front surface to the rear so as to connect the plurality of display holes 1405a. The distinction recess 1405b divides the plurality of display holes 1405a into two, a display hole 1405a (LED1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 177, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are LED1401 when viewed from a player seated at a position 50 cm to 70 cm away from the function display unit 1400A in front of the pachinko machine 1. The light from the light is directed in three directions: one that can be seen only by the left eye, one that can be seen only by the right eye, and one that can be seen by either the left eye or the right eye. That is, the plurality of display holes 1405a are divided into three, one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the light from all the LEDs 1401 can be seen by the player with both eyes, so that when the special lottery result or the like is displayed, the light emission status of the plurality of LEDs 1401 is clarified. It can be visually recognized, and can exhibit the same functions as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, either one for the left eye and one for both eyes, or one for the right eye and both eyes is photographed. Therefore, it is difficult to photograph the light emitting state (light emitting state) of all the LEDs 1401. That is, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1401 can be made unclear, and it is difficult to determine the display contents of the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photograph taken, the display content on the function display unit 1400A is clarified, and the special lottery result of the lottery is "missing", mere "big hit", "probability change hit", "time saving hit", By knowing the "second jackpot (ST hit)", etc., you will not be able to enjoy the production to suggest the result of the special lottery, or you will not be able to enjoy the advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit" game) that is occurring. It is possible to avoid such a situation, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400A of the present embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is different, and the display content is matched to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Is made to look good, so that the display content of the function display unit 1400A can be clearly shown from behind the seated player. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being looked into by other players, and the game can be played without worrying about other players. Can be entertained.

Further, as described above, since the display content is made to look good according to the position of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the function by the digital camera or the like is performed from the position behind the player. It is possible to make it more difficult to photograph the displayed contents on the display unit 1400A, and it is possible to surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are added in the left-right direction and also in the up-down direction so as to be different in the vertical direction, and the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 The displayed contents look good when viewed from the height. As a result, when an attempt is made to take a picture with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height direction as well, which makes it more difficult to take a picture of the display contents of the function display unit 1400A.

Further, since the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, the right eye, etc., it is possible to suppress an increase in the distance between the plurality of LEDs 1401 in the left-right direction on the function display board 1402. The width of the display unit 1400A in the left-right direction can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are directed in the direction of each section in order to be used for the left eye, the right eye, etc., but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the function display unit 1400B having the configuration shown in FIG. 178 may be used.

The function display unit 1400B includes a function display board 1411 on which a plurality of left LEDs 1411a and a plurality of right LEDs 1411b separated by a predetermined distance (distance between the left and right pupils of the player) in the left-right direction are mounted on the front surface, and a function display. A translucent translucent 1412 provided on the front side of the substrate 1411 and independently transmitting the light from the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b to the front, and a translucent translucent 1412 provided on the front side of the reflector 1412. It includes a sheet 1413, a left LED 1411a provided on the front side of the translucent sheet 1413 and transmitted through the reflector 1412, and a reflector front 1414 that radiates light from the right LED 1411b forward.

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are separated from each other by 40 mm to 80 mm in the left-right direction. The reflector rear 1412 is provided with a plurality of through holes 1412a so as to correspond to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411. The plurality of through holes 1412a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411. The reflector front 1414 is provided with a plurality of display holes 1414a so as to correspond to the plurality of through holes 1412a of the reflector rear 1412. The plurality of display holes 1414a are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411.

This function display unit 1400B is configured so that when viewed from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a can be seen only by the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b can be seen only by the right eye. ing. Therefore, since the light from all of the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen by the player with both eyes, the same function as that of the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment can be exhibited.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated in the left-right direction, only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like, and the second embodiment. It is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the function display unit 1400A of.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, since the plurality of display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414 are directed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, from a position other than the front surface of the function display unit 1400B. Since the displayed contents cannot be clearly seen, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the displayed contents with a digital camera or the like.

Further, according to the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414 are directed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and all face the same direction, so that the reflector front 1414 is easy to use. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B having a configuration that is difficult to shoot with a monocular digital camera or the like are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display having a configuration as shown in FIG. 179 is shown. It may be unit 1400C.

The function display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, etc.) that can be photographed by a digital camera or the like, making it difficult to discriminate the display contents. Specifically, a function display board 1421 on which a plurality of LEDs 1421a are mounted on the front surface, a reflector rear 1422 provided on the front side of the function display board 1421, and a flat plate-shaped plate provided on the front side of the reflector rear 1422. It includes a light guide plate 1423, an auxiliary substrate 1424 on which an invisible light LED 1424a that irradiates invisible light on the side surface of the light guide plate 1423 is mounted, and a reflector front 1425 provided on the front side of the light guide plate 1423.

The reflector rear 1422 has a plurality of through holes 1422a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 1421a of the function display board 1421 respectively. When light from the invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 is incident on the light guide plate 1423 from the side surface, at least the portion of the display hole 1425a in front of the reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a of the auxiliary substrate 1424 emits either infrared rays or ultraviolet rays as invisible light. The invisible light LED 1424a emits light in a state where a special lottery result or the like is displayed by a plurality of LEDs 1421a, and invisible light is radiated from the light guide plate 1423. The reflector front 1425 has a plurality of display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the reflector rear 1422. The plurality of through holes 1422a after the reflector 1422 and the plurality of display holes 1425a in the front 1425 of the reflector are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1421.

According to this function display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light by the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light. Therefore, the LED 1421a provided behind the light guide plate 1423. You can see the light of, and you can see the displayed contents in good condition.

On the other hand, when this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or the like, if invisible light can be photographed, the light guide plate emitting light by the invisible light makes it appear that all the display holes 1425a are emitting light. , The displayed content can be made unclear, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the one provided with the reflector 1403 (1412 after the reflector) and the translucent sheet 1404 (translucent sheet 1413) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function display board 1402 (function) is provided. A configuration in which the reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) is directly provided on the front surface of the display board 1411) may be provided.

Further, as a configuration that makes it difficult to shoot the display contents of the function display unit with a digital camera or the like, for example, the LEDs may be distributed and displayed in a range wider than the shooting range of the digital camera or the like, and the LED is lit by the player. You may make the LED blink at a speed that makes it look like it is off when you take a picture with a digital camera, etc., or you can turn off the LED that has nothing to do with the display to the player. It is possible to display by using a plurality of dummy LEDs that appear to be on or off when taken with a digital camera or the like, or by arranging a high-brightness LED near the function display unit. It is also possible to cause halation when shooting with a digital camera or the like so that the displayed contents are not captured.

[11. Second embodiment of mounting a magnetic sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the game board 5 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 180. 180 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor of (a) in a perspective view, and (c) is (b). ) Is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in an exploded manner, and (d) is an exploded perspective view of the mounting of the magnetic sensor shown by a holding member different from (c).

In the second embodiment of mounting the magnetic sensor 1050, the holding member 1071 which is mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed of through holes, and the holding member 1071 are locked. A holding container 1072 having an elastic claw 1072a locked to the portion 1071a and accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are formed of a non-magnetic material.

Further, the holding container 1072 has a hole on the surface opposite to the elastic claw 1072a. Through the hole of the holding container 1072, the electric wire from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the holding container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

According to the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1071 or the like draws a magnetic field line from the magnet. It is possible to prevent the magnetic field lines from being brought together, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity using the magnet at an early stage, and the fraudulent activity is notified by notifying the detection of the suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the holding member 1071, and thus it is made of a magnetic material like a conventional pachinko machine. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 without using a metal screw, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the magnetism.

Further, since the locking portion 1071a penetrating the holding member 1071 is provided and the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to the locking portion 1071a, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached. The configuration of the holding member 1071 to be attached can be simplified, and the cost of the holding member 1071 can be reduced.

Further, since the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 180 (d), a plurality of sets of locking portions are previously attached to the holding member 1071. By providing the 1071a and locking the elastic claw 1072a to the arbitrary locking portion 1071a, the position where the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be arbitrarily set. Alternatively, the holding member 1071 may be provided with another locking portion 1071a at a position different from the locking portion 1071a in which the elastic claw 1072a is locked. As a result, when the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 is to be changed or when the magnetic sensor 1050 is to be added, the holding member 1071 can be dealt with without being replaced with a new one, and the cost can be reduced and the holding member 1071 can be held. The versatility of the member 1071 can be increased.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized. , The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 is locked to the locking portion 1071a at an appropriate position, whereby the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided. Can be provided at an arbitrary position or the position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, the pachinko machine 1 capable of easily responding to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

Further, an urging portion such as a protrusion for pressing the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided inside the holding container 1072. As a result, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 is disconnected or poor contact occurs due to the vibration. The sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

In the above embodiment, a through hole is shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any shape may be used as long as the elastic claw 1072a can be locked. , Slit, etc.

Further, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 is shown to accommodate the magnetic sensor 1050 in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding container for accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the horizontal direction may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sensor case of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited to this. An elastic claw may be formed on the 1053 to be locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Further, although the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050 has been described above, this mounting structure may be used for mounting the vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be attached by housing the vibration sensor in a holding container having elastic claws and locking the elastic claws with a locking portion of the holding member. The vibration sensor is not affected by the surrounding magnetic material, but if the same mounting structure as this magnetic sensor 1050 is used, it is effective in changing / moving the mounting location and reducing the cost related to mounting.

[12. Another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a seal]
Subsequently, another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a seal different from the above embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184 and the like. In this chapter, a member with a predetermined decoration is a decorative body, a member with a decorative body attached to one surface is a first member, and a member with a decorative body attached to the other surface side is a member. The second member will be referred to as the second member. The decorative body, the first member, and the second member may be arranged side by side, vertically, or horizontally.

FIG. 181 (a) is an explanatory cross-sectional view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the positioning hole for the second member, and FIG. 181 (b) is for removing the decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in which the closed space is formed by the 2nd member by the 2nd member behind the separation hole of the 1st member in the cross section, and (c) is the state which the decorative body of different thickness is attached in (b). Is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the above, and FIG. 1D is an explanatory view showing an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body is also used as the mounting hole of the decorative body. FIG. 182 (a) is an explanatory view shown from the front with the decorative body attached to the first member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is a decorative body different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st member which attached.

FIG. 183 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the horizontally long rectangular decorative body and the first member, and FIG. 183 (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the circular decorative body and the first member, (c). ) Is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the first member provided symmetrically, and (d) is an explanation showing the relationship with the decorative body and the first member provided symmetrically in a shape different from (c). It is a figure. FIG. 184 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, FIG. 184 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the starter line in (a), and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a decorative body and a first member in (a) and (c), and (d) is the front view of the relationship between a decorative body of a form different from (a), and a movable first member. It is explanatory drawing shown from the above, (e) is the cross-sectional view cut by the chee line in (d).

First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (a), a decorative body 1801 on which predetermined decorations and characters are printed and formed of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached to one side. , A second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 is on the opposite side of the flat plate portion 1821a, the mounting recess 1821b recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and the mounting recess 1821b of the flat plate portion 1821a. The boss portion 1821c protruding from the other surface portion, the separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and the separation hole 1821d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The rib 1821e and the rib 1821e are provided. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 separates the first member 1821 from the base portion 1841a in which the boss portion 1821c of the first member 1821 and the tips of the ribs 1821e are in contact with one surface and the base portion 1841a protruding from one surface of the base portion 1841a. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 1841b inserted into the hole 1821d. By inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with each other.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841. The interior is a closed space. The separation hole 1821d is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1821b. The separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 on the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1821. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b by using the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1821d can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1821d.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is formed by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since it is closed from the other side and does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine like a conventional pachinko machine, it has a linear shape like a piano wire from the other side of the second member 1841 through the hole. It is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted into the game board 5, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed.

Further, since the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1821d, the second member is second. Since the positioning protrusion 1841b of the member 1841 can prevent further insertion (intrusion) into the other side, it prevents an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities from being carried out, and since a trace is left on the decorative body 1801 when the fraudulent tool penetrates the decorative body 1801, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 is replaced with the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, second The attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1841 may be used as the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (b), a decorative body 1801 on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached to one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

The first member 1822 penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a, the mounting recess 1822b which is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, and the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It is provided with a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b on one side, and the other side is one side of the plurality of ribs 1822d and the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by the surface, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1801 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1801 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1801 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1801 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1801 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted inside, and it is possible to prevent cheating.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and the illegal act is performed. Since the improper tool penetrates the decorative body 1801 and leaves a trace on the decorative body 1801, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the fraudulent activity is provided. can do.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of the decorative body 1801 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (c), a decorative body 1802 having a predetermined decoration and having a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm) is provided, and the decorative body 1802 is provided on one side. It includes a first member 1822 to be attached and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration (not shown).

The first member 1822 penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a, the mounting recess 1822b which is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It is provided with a separation hole 1822c and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by a decorative body 1802 having one side attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and the other side is one side of the plurality of ribs 1822d and the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by the surface, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1802 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1802 cannot be correctly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1802 cannot be correctly attached from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1822c and pressing the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the vicinity of the edge of the decorative body 1802 can be removed so as to be rolled up to one side. The decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by the operator pulling the portion, and the decorative body 1802 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1802 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, the replacement work of the decorative body 1802 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by using the separation hole 1822c. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the component parts, and it is possible to reduce the cost for disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed, and the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the above, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached. Since it does not penetrate a hole that passes through the entire pachinko machine unlike a conventional pachinko machine, a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire passes through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent it from being inserted inside, and it is possible to prevent cheating.

Further, since the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body 1802 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 further closes the separation hole 1822c. Since it is possible to prevent the insertion (intrusion) of the tool into the other side, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, and the illegal act is performed. Since the improper tool penetrates the decorative body 1802 and leaves a trace on the decorative body 1802, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the fraudulent activity is provided. can do.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

Examples of the decorative body 1802 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like. Examples of the decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum forming, compressed air molding, high frequency molding, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181 (d), a decorative body 1803 having a predetermined decoration and being thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and having rigidity, and a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached to one side. And a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has a mounting dowel 1803a projecting to the other side. By press-fitting the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later, the decorative body 1803 can be mounted on the first member 1822.

The first member 1822 has a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b that is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion 1822a and is in contact with the decorative body 1803, and a mounting dowel that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the portion of the mounting recess 1822b. It includes a separation hole 1822c into which 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other surface of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, at least a part of the ribs 1822d among the plurality of ribs 1822d is provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed by a mounting dowel 1803a, one side of which protrudes from the decorative body 1803, and the other side is a plurality of ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842. It is open to the closed space surrounded by, and the whole is a closed space. The separation hole 1822c is provided at a position close to the edge hidden by the decorative body 1803 in the mounting recess 1822b.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the decorative body 1803 cannot be correctly attached to the attachment recess 1822b of the first member 1822 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the other side of the first member 1822. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1822c and pressing the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, the other side surface of the decorative body 1803 is separated from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b and the decorative body 1803 Can be easily removed from the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1803 can be reattached.

Further, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof. By doing so, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822, so that the replacement work of the decorative body 1803 due to the model change can be facilitated.

Further, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated from each other, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 by using the separation hole 1822c. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material for the components of the above, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, by pressing the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and mounting the decorative body 1803 on the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, so that the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1822c can be suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1822c.

Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822, as in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the hole that passes through the entire machine is not penetrated, it is necessary to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1842 through the hole. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, an unauthorized tool is pierced through the decorative body 1803 from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c. However, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a can prevent the penetration. For example, even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the separation hole 1822c can be prevented from being further inserted (invaded) into the other side by the second member 1842. It is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through which the illegal tool is passed, prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1803 to prevent the illegal tool from entering the decorative body 1803. Since the trace remains in the machine, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, the gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, and the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be used as a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be used as a base member, a decorative substrate, or the like.

In addition, examples of the decorative body 1803 include those that are decorated in a relief shape and formed by injection molding. Further, the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative body 1803, may be insert-molded, or may be separately assembled. good.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) and 182 (b), a decorative body 1804 on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a decorative body 1804 are attached to one side. It includes a first member 1823. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1823 may include any of the above configurations.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface thereof, and has translucency. The decorative body 1804 has a substantially square outer shape, and chamfered portions 1804a having a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Since the overall shape of the decorative body 1804 is an overall shape in which it is difficult to specify the orientation, the orientation can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. .. Although the chamfered portion 1804a is shown here as an R chamfer, it may be a C chamfer.

Further, the decorative body 1804 is provided with a glue surface 1804b (a shaded portion in FIG. 182 (a)) provided on the back surface with a substantially constant width (width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) along the outer peripheral edge. have. The width of the glue surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width according to the size of the decorative body 1804. Limiting the glue surface 1804b to only the outer peripheral edge in this way is particularly often used with a transparent seal (decorative body 1804) when it is desired to show an illumination or a design surface such as an LED at the rear.

The first member 1823 is one size larger than the decorative body 1804 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1823a and the flat plate portion 1823a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1823b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the portion of the mounting recess 1823b. The first member 1823 is formed transparently.

The separation hole 1823c is provided at a position close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and not covered by the glue surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached (position inside the glue surface 1804b). As a result, the adhesive surface 1804b is applied to the separation hole 1823c, so that the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is prevented from being lowered.

The separation hole 1823c is a round hole. The separation hole 1823c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not sufficiently press the decorative body 1804. This is because if the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1823c in the decoration body 1804, and the appearance of the decoration body 1804 may be deteriorated.

Further, the first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, and is provided with a chamfered portion 1823d (with a radius) larger than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining one corner is used as an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two end edges forming the corner of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as a reference surface for attaching the decorative body 1804. As a result, at least two clearance directions for pasting the decorative body 1804 are secured, which facilitates the pasting work.

Further, the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f indicating a portion of the contact surface in the mounting recess 1823b. The identification portion 1823f is recessed from the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By the operator looking at the identification unit 1823f, the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804 can be immediately recognized, it is possible to prevent an error in the position of the contact surface, and the attachment work can be performed. It is easy to do.

In the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1823b is 0.5 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1823b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner portion of the decorative body 1804 not provided with the chamfered portion 1804a is erroneously attached to the contact surface of the mounting recess 1823b indicated by the identification portion 1823f. It is brought into contact with the prevention portion 1823e), and the glue surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b from the portion to be attached. When the corner portion of the decorative body 1804 provided with the chamfered portion 1804a is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e), the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e with respect to the chamfered portion 1804a. Is different, it is possible to notice that the decorative body 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the normal direction.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, thereby causing the edge of the decorative body 1804. It can be removed so that the vicinity can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823) by pulling the rolled up portion. It is possible to produce the same action and effect as the composition.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position where the decorative body 1804 is not covered with the glue surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole 1823c is decorated with the glue surface 1804b. It is possible to prevent the sticking strength of the body 1804 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from coming off.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, if the decorative body 1804 is attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1804 is attached. By making the shape of the chamfered portion 1804a different from the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1804, and the decorative body 1804 is pasted on the first member 1823 in the normal orientation. In addition to being able to be attached, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the identification portion 1823f indicating the contact surface is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823, the operator can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface as the attachment reference of the decorative body 1804. It is possible to prevent mistakes in the position of the contact surface, and it is easy to perform the pasting work.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 is replaced with the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1804 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment of FIGS. 182 (c), in the embodiments of FIGS. 182 (a) and 182 (b), the glue surface 1804 b of the decorative body 1804 is added to the portion along the outer peripheral edge on one diagonal line. It is also provided in the part of. Other configurations are the same as those of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 182 (a) and 182 (b), and the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the present embodiment, in addition to exhibiting the same effects as described above, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the sticking strength is increased and the decorative body 1804 is more difficult to come off. Even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a rate different from that of the first member 1823 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is attached by the diagonal glue surface 1804b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from swelling or wavy, and it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1804 from being deteriorated in appearance.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the glue surface can be reduced as compared with the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface of the decorative body 1804, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. it can. Further, since the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower than that in the case where the glue surface is provided on the entire surface, the work of removing the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c can be facilitated.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 183 (a), a horizontally long rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and made of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a decorative body on one side. It includes a first member 1824 to which 1805 is attached. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1824 may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1824 is omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1805 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is provided with a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a notched diagonally at one corner (lower left corner in the drawing). Since the decorative body 1805 has a shape in which it is difficult to specify the vertical orientation, the orientation can be specified by making the shape of one corner different from the shape of the remaining corners. The glue surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1824 is one size larger than the decorative body 1805 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1824a and the flat plate portion 1824a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1824b, which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

Further, the first member 1824 has a C-chamfered erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c protruding into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner portion (lower left corner portion in the drawing) of the mounting recess 1824b. As a result, the mounting recess 1824b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In the first member 1824, the diagonally extending end portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c are the reference for attaching the decorative body 1805. It is set on the contact surface. As a result, the clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1805 are secured in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the hypotenuse side of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c. The pasting work is easy to perform.

In the first member 1824, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1824b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first, the hypotenuse of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are contacted with the contact surface of the mounting recess 1824b (wrong). The hypotenuse part of the sticking prevention part 1824c and the short side part connected to the erroneous sticking prevention part 1824c) are brought into contact with each other, and the glue surface on the back side from the part is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b for sticking. wear.

When the corner portion of the decorative body 1805 not provided with the chamfered portion 1805a is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c), the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c with respect to the chamfered portion 1805a. Because of the difference, it is possible to notice that the decorative body 1805 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1805 can be attached in the normal direction. Further, when the decorative body 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong direction, the right-angled corner of the decorative body 1805 protrudes from the mounting recess 1824b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c. It is possible to notice the erroneous pasting of the decorative body 1805.

According to the present embodiment, since the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1824c is provided in the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached, the decorative body 1805 is attached in a direction different from the normal one. Then, the shape of the corner where the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative body 1805 is not provided is different from the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1824c, so that the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1805 can be noticed, and the decorative body can be noticed. The 1805 can be attached to the first member 1824 in a normal orientation, and the decorative body 1805 can be prevented from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong orientation.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1805 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 183 (b), a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded portion) on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed and formed of a sheet-shaped sticker, and a decorative body 1806 on one side. The first member 1825 to which the is attached is provided. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1825 may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1825 is omitted.

The decorative body 1806 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape, and is provided with a notch portion 1806a cut out in an arc shape from the outside (lower part in the drawing). Since the decorative body 1806 has a shape in which it is difficult to specify the orientation, the orientation can be specified by providing the notch 1806a. The glue surface of the decorative body 1806 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1825 is one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1825a and the flat plate portion 1825a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm). ) It has a mounting recess 1825b, which is recessed and to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

Further, the first member 1825 has an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape with a radius corresponding to the notch portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 at the peripheral edge of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end portion in the peripheral edge in the drawing). doing. As a result, the mounting recess 1825b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In the first member 1825, the arcuate end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c is set as a contact surface as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1806. As a result, the clearance direction for attaching the decorative body 1806 is at least two directions, that is, the direction along the arc of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c and the direction away from the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c (vertical direction in the figure). It is secured and makes it easy to perform pasting work.

In the first member 1825, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1825b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the cutout portion 1806a of the decorative body 1806 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, and the glue surface on the back side is brought into contact with the contact surface. Gradually bring it into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attach it.

When the decorative body 1806 was applied to the peripheral surface other than the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c) in the mounting recess 1825b, the decorative body 1806 protruded from the mounting recess 1825b at the portion of the mounting recess 1825c. In this state, the operator can be made aware of the erroneous attachment of the decorative body 1806.

According to the present embodiment, since the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1825c is provided in the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is attached, the decorative body 1806 is attached in a direction different from the normal one. Then, the decorative body 1806 protrudes at the portion of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1825c, and the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1806 can be noticed, and the decorative body 1806 can be stuck to the first member 1825 in the normal direction. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1806 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 is a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, side upper left unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center accessory 2500, first. (2 Attacker unit 2600, side right middle unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.) may be used, or may be used as a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body 1806 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

Next, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 183 (c) and 183 (d), a pair of decorative bodies left 1807L and decorative body right 1807L, which are symmetrically provided and have predetermined decorations, characters, etc. printed on them and consist of a sheet-shaped sticker. It includes 1807R (shaded portion) and a pair of first member left 1826L and first member right 1826R to which a decorative body left 1807L and a decorative body right 1807R are attached to one side. The other side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the separation hole and the contact surface in the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is omitted.

The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are stickers on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed on the surface. The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are symmetrical to each other. In the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, the end edges that are close to each other extend vertically in a straight line, and the upper end and the lower end of the end edge are formed by an arcuate end edge that bulges in a direction away from each other. It is formed in a substantially semicircular shape that is long vertically, as if connected.

The decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 183 (c) have different radius of R chamfer provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction, that is, the upper end and the lower end of the semicircle. On the other hand, in the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in FIG. 183 (d), the upper end side (one end side in the longitudinal direction) of the semicircle is chamfered, and the lower end side (the other end side in the longitudinal direction) is linear. Notched. Both the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R have shapes that are difficult to identify for the left side and the right side when the top and bottom are reversed. Therefore, by making the shapes of the upper end side and the lower end side different, whether it is for the left side or the right side can be determined. I am trying to identify it.

The glue surfaces of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are formed symmetrically with each other. The first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R are one size larger than the decorative body 1806 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1826a and the flat plate portion 1826a, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. There is a mounting recess 1826b that is recessed deeper than the thickness (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) and to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached, and an erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the mounting recess 1826b. doing.

The misattachment prevention portion 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. 183 (c) has an R chamfering radius larger than the radius of the lower end side of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. It is provided in. On the other hand, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R in FIG. 183 (d) is provided in a horizontally extending linear notch shape. In any of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c is set as a reference surface for sticking the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R. Has been done.

As a result, in the embodiment of FIG. 183 (c), the clearance direction for pasting the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R is the arc direction that rolls the arc of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c and the erroneous sticking. At least two directions are secured, one is the direction away from the prevention portion 1826c (the vertical direction in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 183 (d), the clearance directions for pasting the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are the directions along the straight line of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c (left-right direction in the drawing). At least two directions are secured, one is the direction away from the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c (the vertical direction in the figure). As described above, in any of the embodiments, at least two clearance directions are secured, which makes it easy to perform the pasting work.

In the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1826b is likely to be chipped.

When the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are oriented in the longitudinal direction. Of both ends, the one with the larger radius of R chamfer or the one that is notched linearly is in a state of facing downward, and abuts on the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1826c). Then, the glue surface on the back side from the relevant portion is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b and attached.

If the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are turned upside down and then left and right are reversed, a contact surface (misattachment prevention portion) is applied to the shape of the lower end portion. Since the shapes of 1826c) are different, it is possible to notice that the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are pasted in the wrong direction, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are pasted in the normal orientation. Can be attached.

According to the present embodiment, since the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1826c is provided in each of the mounting recesses 1826b of the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R to which the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are attached. When the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are pasted in different directions, the shape of the end portion of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R in the longitudinal direction and the shape of the erroneous pasting prevention portion 1826c are obtained. By differentiating, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R, and the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R are oriented in the normal direction, and the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R. It is possible to prevent the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R from being shipped in the state of being stuck in the wrong direction.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R may be members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

Examples of the decorative body left 1807L and the decorative body right 1807R include PET seals, flex metal seals (trade name), metallic seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, and the like.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (c), a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-shaped sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1808 are attached to one side. It includes a movable first member 1827. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1827 may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative body 1808 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the upper two corners are R-chamfered and the lower two corners are C-chamfered. The orientation of the decorative body 1808 can be specified by the difference in the chamfered shape between the upper side and the lower side. The glue surface of the decorative body 1808 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1827 is one size larger than the decorative body 1808 from one surface of the horizontally long rectangular and flat plate-shaped flat plate portion 1827a and the flat plate portion 1827a, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808 (0. (4 mm to 1.0 mm) A mounting recess 1827b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1827a at the site of the mounting recess 1827b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b. It is provided with an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d provided in the portion.

Further, the first member 1827 has a pair of shaft portions 1827e projecting in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the shaft portion 1827e is located on the opposite side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. In the first member 1827, a pair of shaft portions 1827e are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1827 is movable so as to be rotatable (rotatable) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portion 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, may be insert-molded, or may be separately assembled. good.

The separation hole 1827c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1827b. Since the two separation holes 1827c are provided at positions far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at a position far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when the 1827 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved lightly. it can. Further, since the two separation holes 1827c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the forces applied to the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be made equal, and the first member 1827 is balanced. As a result, uneven wear and the like can be reduced.

The separation hole 1827c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the decorative body 1808. This is because if the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1827c in the decoration body 1808, and the appearance of the decoration body 1808 may be deteriorated.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d projects into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape corresponding to the C chamfer at the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the diagonal end side of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d and the lower end side of the mounting recess 1827b are set as a reference surface for sticking the decorative body 1808.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b, the weight of the first member 1827 increases. However, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position close to the shaft core of the shaft portion 1827e. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be suppressed. Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at each of the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. At the same time, the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the first member 1827, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1827b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of the decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the contact surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b. Then, the glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from the relevant portion and attached. If the decorative body 1808 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is different from the shape of the R chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1808, so that the decorative body 1808 is oriented toward sticking. It is possible to notice that the mistake is made, and the decorative body 1808 can be pasted in the proper orientation. Further, when the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong direction, the corner portion of the decorative body 1808 protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1827d, and the decorative body is used for the operator. You can notice the erroneous pasting of 1808.

Further, the first member 1827 is recessed in a portion of the mounting recess 1827b near the edge and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 184 (b)). The separation groove 1827f is straddled by the decorative body 1808 in a state where the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, and forms a space between the separated groove 1827f and the decorative body 1808. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the portion of the separation groove 1827f in the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the outside, a part of the decorative body 1808 is depressed into the separation groove 1827f. At the same time, the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is in a state of being raised from the mounting recess 1827b, and the decorative body 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b by pulling the raised portion.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827, and the decorative body 1808 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, thereby causing the edge of the decorative body 1808. It can be removed so that the vicinity can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1808 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827) by pulling the rolled up portion by the operator. It is possible to produce the same action and effect as the composition.

Further, since the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1827d is provided in the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, if the decorative body 1808 is attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1808 is attached. By making the shape of the corner portion different from the shape of the misattachment prevention portion 1827d, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1808, and the decorative body 1808 is attached to the first member 1827 in the normal orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the separation hole 1827c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1827d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1827 is rotated. Since it is possible to reduce the amount due to the rotational moment, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1827 can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be moved (rotated) lightly.

Further, since the first member 1827 is provided with two separation holes 1827c and two misattachment prevention portions 1827d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1827e can be balanced, and the shaft portion 1827e can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1827 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may be a movable member for directing.

Examples of the decorative body 1808 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

By the way, when the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc., the game ball B comes into contact with the decorative body 1808, so that the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1808 are used. It is desirable that one member 1827 has the following relationship.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, from the upper end edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827. If the distance to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c and the radius of the game ball B is r, then the distance d should be within the range of [0 <d <r] and then the distance. It is desirable that c is within the range of [0 ≦ c <(2rd ^ 2-d ^ 2) ^ 0.5]. The expression is shown in the key brackets.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, so that it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1808 from coming off due to the contact of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects. Can be made to.

The distance d is preferably in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If the distance d is smaller than this, the decorative body 1808 may protrude forward from the flat plate portion 1827a depending on the tolerance of the decorative body 1808, and the game ball B may come into contact with the upper end side. If it is larger than this, the shadow due to the upper end edge of the mounting recess 1827b is likely to be cast on the decorative body 1808, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 1808 may be deteriorated.

Further, the contact surface in the mounting recess 1827b may be set to the upper end side. As a result, the upper end side of the decorative body 1808 is in contact with the upper end side of the mounting recess 1827b, so that the game ball B does not come into contact with the upper end side of the decorative body 1808, which is the same as described above. It can exert an action effect.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 184 (d) and 184 (e), a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-shaped sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, etc. are printed, and a decorative body 1809 are attached to one side. It includes a movable first member 1828. The configuration (including the second member) on the other side of the first member 1828 may include any of the above configurations. Further, in the present embodiment, the description of the identification unit indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker on which a predetermined pattern, characters, or the like is printed on the surface. The decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the upper two corners are R-chamfered, and the lower two corners are provided with quadrangular notches 1809a. .. The cutout portion 1809a is formed in a shape corresponding to the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d described later of the first member 1828. The orientation of the decorative body 1809 can be specified by the difference in shape between the upper and lower corners. The glue surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided with a constant width along the outer peripheral edge as in FIG. 182 (a) or the like, or may be provided on the entire surface.

The first member 1828 has a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate-shaped flat plate portion 1828a and a size one size larger than the decorative body 1809 from one surface of the flat plate portion 1828a and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1809 (0. 4 mm to 1.0 mm) A mounting recess 1828b that is recessed and to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1828a at the site of the mounting recess 1828b, and two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b. It is provided with an erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d provided in the portion.

Further, the first member 1828 includes a semi-cylindrical shaft support portion 1828e that bulges to one side in the left-right direction toward the shaft core at the lower left and right corners of the flat plate portion 1827a, and a shaft support portion. It includes a shaft hole 1828f provided on each end surface of the 1828e on the outer side in the left-right direction, and a columnar shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft hole 1828f. In the first member 1828, a pair of shaft portions 1828 g are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). That is, the first member 1828 is movable so as to be rotatable (rotatable) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828 g. The shaft portion 1828g of the first member 1828 may be the one inserted at the time of molding the flat plate portion 1827a or the like, or may be separately assembled.

The shaft support portion 1828e is provided up to the portion of the mounting recess 1828b, and a part of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d. The shaft support portion 1828e (misattachment prevention portion 1828d) forms the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b in a shape as if it were cut out in a square shape.

The separation hole 1828c is a round hole and is provided near the upper corner in the mounting recess 1828b. Since the two separation holes 1828c are provided at positions far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828 g, the weight of the first member 1828 at a position far from the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828 g can be reduced, so that the weight of the first member can be reduced. The rotational moment that acts when the 1828 is rotated (rotated) can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved lightly. it can. Further, since the two separation holes 1828c are provided near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be made equal, and the first member 1828 is balanced. As a result, uneven wear and the like can be reduced.

The separation hole 1828c of the present embodiment has an inner diameter in the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c becomes smaller, which makes it easier to bend and may not be able to sufficiently press the decorative body 1809. This is because if the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, bending may occur at the portion of the separation hole 1828c in the decoration body 1809, and the appearance of the decoration body 1809 may be deteriorated.

The erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d has a shape protruding in a quadrangular shape at the lower corner portion of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support portion 1828e, and has a shape corresponding to the notch portion 1809a at the lower corner portion of the decorative body 1809. It has become. In this embodiment, the upper end edge of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is set as a contact surface as a reference for sticking the decorative body 1809.

Since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d protrudes into the mounting recess 1828b, the weight of the first member 1828 increases. However, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position close to the shaft core of the shaft portion 1828g. Therefore, the influence of the rotational moment increased by the erroneous sticking prevention unit 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be suppressed. Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at each of the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced and uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. At the same time, the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the first member 1828, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b is 1 mm or more. This is because if the distance is smaller than this, when the game ball B collides with another member, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1828b is likely to be chipped.

When attaching the decorative body 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the cutout portion 1809a of the decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misattachment prevention portion 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and the portion concerned. The glue surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b and attached. If the decorative body 1809 is to be pasted upside down, the shape of the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is different from the shape of the R chamfer at the corner of the decorative body 1809, so that the decorative body 1809 is suitable for sticking. It is possible to notice that the mistake is made, and the decorative body 1809 can be pasted in the proper orientation. Further, when the decorative body 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong direction, the corner portion of the decorative body 1809 protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b at the portion of the erroneous attachment prevention portion 1828d, and the decorative body is used for the operator. It is possible to notice the erroneous pasting of 1809.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828, and the decorative body 1809 is pressed from the other side to one side by the tip thereof, so that the edge of the decorative body 1809 is pressed. It can be removed so that the vicinity can be rolled up to one side, and the decorative body 1809 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828) by pulling the rolled up portion. It is possible to produce the same action and effect as the configuration.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided in the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, if the decorative body 1809 is attached in a direction different from the normal one, the decorative body 1809 is attached. By making the shape of the corner portion different from the shape of the misattachment prevention portion 1828d, it is possible to notice the wrong orientation of the decorative body 1809, and the decorative body 1809 is attached to the first member 1828 in the normal orientation. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 1809 from being shipped in a state of being attached in the wrong direction.

Further, since the separation hole 1828c is provided at a position far from the axis of rotation and the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1828d is provided at a position close to the axis of rotation, it acts when the first member 1828 is rotated. Since the rotation moment can be reduced, the load applied to the rotational drive of the first member 1828 can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be moved (rotated) lightly.

Further, since the first member 1828 is provided with two separation holes 1828c and two misattachment prevention portions 1828d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be balanced, and the shaft portion 1828g can be balanced. Uneven wear and the like can be reduced, and the first member 1828 can be rotated (rotated) in a stable state.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or an accessory winning opening, or is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000. It may be a movable member for directing.

Examples of the decorative body 1809 include a PET seal, a flex metal seal (trade name), a metallic seal (trade name), a potting seal, an aluminum seal, and the like.

[13. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
The panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5A in the present embodiment is used as the front member of the present invention, and the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present invention is used as the decoration unit of the present invention. The back front left first decorative body 3124, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127 are used in the decorative body of the present invention according to the present embodiment. In the back front left first decorative body 3124, the dividing decorative portion 3124a, the back front left second decorative body 3125, the dividing decorative portion 3125c, and the back front left third decorative body 3126, the dividing decorative portion 3126c, are used as the light-shielding portion of the present invention. Each is equivalent.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration unit 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, the back front left sub decoration part 3123, and the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the present embodiment are the first front left. Logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f, back front left second decoration 3125 second back left logo decoration part 3125d and second Upper left logo decoration part 3125e and second left sub decoration part 3125f, back front left third decoration 3126 third back left logo decoration part 3126d, third upper left logo decoration part 3126e and third left sub decoration part 3126f, back front The base upper left logo decoration portion 3127d of the left decoration base 3127 corresponds to the decoration portion of the present invention.

Further, the first lower LED 3128a, the first upper LED 3128b, the second lower LED 3128c, the second upper LED 3128d, the third lower LED 3128e, the third upper LED 3128f, the base lower LED 3128h, and the base upper LED 3128i of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the present embodiment. The LED of the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, the first LED 3130a, the second LED 3130b, and the third LED 3130c of the back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[14. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left) of the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The second decorative body 3125, the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the back front left decorative body base 3127) have their respective decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front upper left logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub). In a normal state where the decoration unit 3123) is not light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting means (LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3128 or the like), the light transmissive provided in front of the back front left decoration unit 3120. The opaque and white panel plate 1110A, which has the property, makes it difficult to recognize the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120 by making it difficult for the player to recognize the back front upper left logo decoration. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the part 3122 and the like, and it is possible to make the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 look bright by the white color, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122 and the like are appropriately light-emitting and decorated by the plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration unit 3120 according to the progress of the game, the light of the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122 and the like light-emittingly decorated. However, the light is emitted forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A, and the light emitting decoration such as the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 is reflected on the white panel plate 1110A. It is possible to show the player the light emitting decoration of the front upper left logo decoration part 3122 or the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with the light emitting decoration of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 or the like and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, by illuminating the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122 and the like of the back front left decoration unit 3120, the player can be made aware of the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the like that could not be predicted. Because it can be done, it can surprise the player greatly, make the player strongly think that the chance has arrived, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect with a high effect, and entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the color of the translucent opaque panel plate 1110A is white, a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front) of the back front left decoration unit 3120 provided at the rear are provided. Left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127, respectively (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first 1 Upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd back left logo decoration part 3125d, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd back left logo decoration part 3126d, 1st (3) The emission color that is emitted and decorated in the upper left logo decoration section 3126e, the third left sub decoration section 3126f, and the base upper left logo decoration section 3127d) can be shown to the player via the panel plate 1110A as it is. , It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect with various colors, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the various light emitting effects, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, decorative parts having shapes related to each other (“first front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d”, “No. 1 Upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd A plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body) provided with the left sub-decorative portion 3126f "). The base 3127) is stacked in the front-rear direction, and each decorative part is independently illuminated by light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130). Since the positions of each decoration part in the front-rear direction are different because it is possible to do so, if each decoration part is luminescent and decorated, it is possible to show the player a luminescent effect with a sense of depth. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, decorations related to each of a plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). Parts ("First front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first (2) Upper left logo decoration part 3125e, third upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," first left sub decoration part 3124f, second left sub decoration part 3125f, third left sub decoration part 3126f ") Since it is provided, the decorative parts are light-emitting and decorated in an appropriate order by the light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front left lower decorative board 3130) to emit light with movement. The production can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. It can be raised to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, each of the plurality of decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) is provided. Decorative parts ("First front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, second back left logo decoration part 3125d, third back left logo decoration part 3126d", "first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, 2nd upper left logo decoration part 3125e, 3rd upper left logo decoration part 3126e, base upper left logo decoration part 3127d "," 1st left sub decoration part 3124f, 2nd left sub decoration part 3125f, 3rd left sub decoration part 3126f ") Each of the light emitting means (LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front left lower decorative board 3130) can be independently light-emitting and decorated. By appropriately combining the decorative parts, it is possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the deterioration of the interest. In addition, since each decorative portion can be independently luminescent and decorated, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) that gives the player an advantage by combining the decorative portions that illuminate and decorate according to the progress of the game. ) Can be made to suggest to the player.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In the above, between the decorative portions (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122, and back front left sub decoration portion 3123) provided at different positions, a light-shielding portion (separation decoration portion 3124a, Since the partition decorative portion 3125c and the partition decorative portion 3126c) are provided, the light for illuminating one decorative portion is blocked from being irradiated to the other decorative portion by the light-shielding portion, and the other decorative portion emits light. It is possible to prevent decoration, and only one (desired) decoration portion can be light-emitting decorated. Therefore, since the plurality of decorative parts provided in one decorative body can be independently luminescently decorated, various luminescent effects can be produced by luminescently decorating the appropriate decorative parts according to the progress of the game. Can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In the above, a plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and back front left sub decoration part 3123) are provided at different positions from each other, and a light-shielding part (separation decoration part 3124a) is provided between them. , Separation decoration part 3125c, Separation decoration part 3126c) so that each can be independently luminescently decorated. Therefore, by making each decoration part in the decorative body a completely different form of decoration, the game progresses. It is possible to show the player different forms of luminescent decoration according to the situation, which can strongly attract the player's interest, and the luminescent effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Can be made to.

Further, each decorative body of the back front left decorative unit 3120 (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127). In the space between the plurality of decorative parts (back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and back front left sub decoration part 3123), a hole-shaped light-shielding part (separation decoration part 3124a, division decoration part 3125c). , Separation decoration part 3126c) is provided, so that the light for luminescent decoration of one of the decoration parts is radiated from a part of the light-shielding part to the outside, so that a part of the light-shielding part is light-emitting decoration. Can be made to. Therefore, by forming the light-shielding portion into a predetermined shape, it is possible to show the player the light-emitting decoration of the light-shielding portion in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion, and it is possible to perform a wider variety of light-emitting effects.

Further, since the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a penetrating decorative portion 3124b penetrating back and forth in a predetermined shape, the decorative portion is arranged according to the progress of the game. (First front left logo decoration part 3124c, first back left logo decoration part 3124d, first upper left logo decoration part 3124e, first left sub decoration part 3124f) emits light, and the peripheral surface of the penetrating decoration part 3124b emits light. Since the decoration is to be performed, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the decorative portion, the light emitting decoration of the penetrating decoration portion 3124b can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5B, due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is the panel board 1110. Since the cell 1140 is provided in a state where it can be expanded and contracted with respect to the panel plate 1110 even if it expands and contracts more than the above, the cell 1140 can be expanded and contracted freely, and even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. No wrinkles or cracks are generated in the cell 1140, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. At this time, the cell 1140 is provided behind the portion of the panel plate 1110 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached is offset, that is, behind the wide portion of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the pattern of the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be easily seen by the player, the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the cell 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110 can be sufficiently exhibited. The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved by the pattern, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a stretchable state and is not attached to the game panel (panel plate) as in the conventional case, it is easy to take time and effort to decorate the transparent panel plate 1110. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, in the panel plate 1110 to be cut, the cell 1140 can be provided after the cutting, so that the cell 1140 is not damaged during the cutting of the panel plate 1110. Further, the machined surface is not roughened due to the difference in material between the panel plate 1110 and the cell 1140, and the finishing process after the cutting process can be omitted. On the other hand, in the game panel (panel plate) formed so as to have an opening by cutting or injection molding, since the cell 1140 is not attached, the labor required for the attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cell 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 more easily than in the conventional technique, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the amount of the cell 1140 used is compared with the case where the cell 1140 is provided on the entire surface of the panel plate 1110. Can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the cell 1140 can be attached to and detached from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B) can be attached to or replaced with the cell 1140 having a different pattern from the panel plate 1110. ) Can be easily responded to changes in specifications and models, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light emission of various LEDs provided in the back-front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the pattern of the cell 1140 seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 emits light. By being decorated, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a, and the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened. The game ball B circulating in the area 5a can be easily seen.

Further, since the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be light-emitting and decorated by various LEDs provided in the back front effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the cell 1140 can be decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration makes it possible to illuminate the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from behind to make it look like a silhouette, and by making the game ball B easier to see, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Since it is possible to suppress the decrease and to make it easier to see the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a by showing it in silhouette, the driving strength of the game ball B is finely adjusted. It can be made easy, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that devises the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

Further, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, it becomes easy to focus on the pattern of the cell 1140. Therefore, just by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused, and the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is visually recognized. It can be facilitated, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the cell 1140 having a predetermined pattern is provided behind a part of the transparent panel plate 1110, the back front effect of the back unit 3000 provided behind by the pattern of the cell 1140. The decorative body of the unit 3100 can be hidden from the player side. Therefore, in a state where the decorative body provided behind the cell 1140 is not light-emittingly decorated, the pattern of the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the existence of the decorative body. Then, when the decorative body is light-emitting decorated according to the progress of the game, the cell 1140 is light-emitting decorated by the light from the decorative body, so that the presence of the decorative body could not be predicted by the player. It is possible to make the player aware of the light, which can surprise the player greatly, make the player strongly think that an opportunity has arrived, and show the player a more effective light emission effect. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the rear rear left movable decorative body 3301 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 as the movable decorative body provided behind by the cell 1140 can be hidden so as not to be seen from the player side. The back-rear left movable decorative body 3301 is moved according to the progress of the game from the state invisible by the cell 1140 to the state in which the game panel 1100 can be seen through the openings 1112 penetrating the front and rear of the panel plate 1110. Then, it is possible to show a movable effect in which the rear left movable decorative body 3301 appears according to the progress of the game. Therefore, the appearance of the back-rear left movable decorative body 3301 or the like can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, " It is possible to strongly think that a "big hit" game state) will occur, raise expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game board 5A, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in which the game ball B is distributed is set as an opaque milky white having translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear bright, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen, and the LED, the effect display device 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be used. When the game panel 1100 is irradiated with the light from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the light from other pachinko machines, slot machines, or other game machines, the light is emitted. Is diffused in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, so that the panel plate 1110A can appear to be dimly lit and self-luminous. Further, when a plurality of LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 capable of irradiating the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110A are made to emit light, the light is diffused by the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly decorated with light emission like a fluorescent lamp like indirect lighting, the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the glare of the LED 1130a can be reduced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be suppressed and is easy on the player's eyes. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as game panels (panel boards), it has a game area 5a that emits light like a fluorescent lamp that has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a), and the player feels that there is something good about the game. In addition to raising expectations, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A, making the game ball B easier to see. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, if a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel plate 1110A can improve the color development of the pattern applied to the decorative film. It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a by decorating the pattern, and to illuminate the pattern of the decorative film through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 by emitting light from the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, the appearance in the game area 5a can be further improved, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the LED 1130a or the like tends to be unclear due to the opaque panel plate 1110A having translucency. By devising a pattern and devising the pattern (or devising the arrangement of LED1130a etc.) so that the part where the light emitting decoration becomes unclear is hidden by a part of the pattern of the decorative film, it emits light. The decoration can be made to appear clearly, and the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

Further, when the decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, by using a material having excellent wear resistance as the decorative film, the panel plate is used for the distribution of the game ball B by the decorative film. The front surface of the 1110A can be protected. As a result, it is not necessary to use a panel plate 1110A having a high wear resistance, and a low-grade and inexpensive material can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the pattern of the decorative film is reflected on the panel plate 1110A by the light emitted from the rear to the front of the decorative film. Since the pattern can be shown to the player and the light emitting effect of projecting the pattern or characters of the lightly injured film onto the panel plate 1110A from the rear can be shown to the player, the effect is executed to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Alternatively, as the light emitting effect, the game ball B is projected from the rear on the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 by projecting a pattern or characters that encourage "right-handed", operation of the effect operation unit 301, etc. by the decorative film. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the player, the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production, and the like, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the decorative film is provided on both the front surface and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, when the side surface of the panel plate 1110A is irradiated with light by the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the panel is as described above. When the plate 1110A self-illuminates, the decorative film on the front side is light-emittingly decorated, and the player can enjoy the pattern of the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when the game panel 1100 is irradiated with light from the rear to the front by an LED or the like, the shadow of the decorative film on the rear surface is reflected on the panel plate 1110A, and the shadow overlaps with the pattern on the decorative film on the front side. The design of the decorative film on the side will appear to change. As a result, it is possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, the back front upper left logo decoration unit 3122 of the back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration unit 3142 of the back front right decoration unit 3140 provided behind the translucent opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A. Is light-emitting and decorated according to the progress of the game, and the light is transmitted to the front (player side) to some extent through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. It is possible to partially illuminate the decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 in the same manner as the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, and the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 provided at the rear. It can be noticed by the player. Therefore, there may be something good for the player by seeing the light emitting decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 through the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. It can be reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the back front upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 provided behind the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are formed of a colorless and transparent material, the panel plate 1110A is milky white. Because it is white, the color of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 can be assimilated with the color of the panel plate 1110A so that it cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to prevent the presence of the upper left logo decoration portion 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration portion 3142 from being noticed. Then, when the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are light-emitting decorated, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 are light-emitting decoration through the panel plate 1110A as described above. By noticing the existence of the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, which could not be foreseen, the player could be greatly surprised and the player had a chance. It is possible to make the player feel strongly, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect having a higher effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the back rear lower effect unit 3300 are located behind the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A in a normal state, so that they cannot be seen from the front. By moving to the part behind the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110A according to the progress of the game, it becomes visible through the opening 1112. It is possible to show a movable effect in which the movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the back rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) may occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, by enabling the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 to be light-emitting decorated, the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 cannot be seen. A panel having translucency by lighting and blinking the light emitting decorations of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the back rear right movable decorative body 3302 (or the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142). Through the plate 1110A, the player can be made aware of the existence of the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302, and the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 can be visually recognized. Depending on whether or not the player moves to the state (whether or not the back rear left movable decoration body 3301 and the back rear right movable decoration body 3302 appear), the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be more entertained. It is possible to perform a movable effect that is possible.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a in front is made opaque with translucency, when the player looks inside the game area 5a, the panel plate 1110A is placed in front of the panel plate 1110A. Since it becomes easy to focus, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused just by looking at the panel plate 1110A. At this time, as described above, the panel plate 1110A is in a state of self-lighting due to the light from the outside or the light emitted from the LED 1130a or the like, so that the panel plate 1110A is distributed in the game area 5a. Since the existing game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110A, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily recognized. Pachinko machine 1 that can be entertained and suppress the decline in interest, and can make it easy to finely adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, and devise the driving operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the game of the main body.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is opaque and milky white (synthetic resin) having translucency, a lower grade synthetic resin is used as compared with the case where the panel plate is transparent. It can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A has an opaque milky white color having translucency, the color of the decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 is relatively conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the decorative body is strongly exerted. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and also the LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the decoration provided behind the game panel 1100. When the body or the like is light-emittingly decorated, the light-emitting color can be transmitted forward, and the player can enjoy the colorful light-emitting effect.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque and milky white having translucency, a decorative body (for example, the back front left decorative unit 3120) provided behind the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front (player side). It can be made invisible. Then, when the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly decorated, the light from the decorative body is transmitted forward through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) having translucency, so that the game panel 1100 is used. The decoration can be partially luminescent, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the decorative body provided at the rear. Further, when the decorative body provided behind the game panel 1100 is moved to a portion behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the decorative body can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the decorative body is hidden or appears. In this way, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects and movable effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, since the opaque and milky white panel plate 1110A having translucency can diffuse the light from the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game panel 1100 can be softly luminescent and decorated with a soft feeling. It is possible to brighten the inside of the game area 5a with a feeling like indirect lighting, and it is possible to suppress the glare caused by the LED 1130a, so that the pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the player's eyes can be provided.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be light-emitting decorated by the LED 1130a or the like of the panel decorative substrate 1130, for example, the LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left side and the right side of the panel plate 1110A, and each can be independently emitted light. Then, when the right side is made to emit light according to the situation (progress) of the game, the right part in the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A, so that the player's interest is in the right part of the game area 5a. It is possible to urge the game ball B to be driven (“right-handed”) into the right portion of the game area 5a. On the other hand, when the left side is made to emit light, the left portion in the game area 5a becomes bright through the panel plate 1110A, so that the player's attention can be directed to the left portion of the game area 5a, and the left portion of the game area 5a can be directed. You can be prompted to hit the game ball B ("left hit"). In this way, by making the LED 1130a at an appropriate position emit light, it is possible to intuitively understand that the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) advises "left-handed" or "right-handed". It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B, and also to entertain the player with a new sense of light emission effect not found in the conventional pachinko machine 1.

Further, the game panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a panel holder 1120 having a frame shape thicker than the panel plate 1110A and holding the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110A. Therefore, when the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is the same as that of the game panel of the conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) provided with the game area 5a in front is made larger than that of the conventional game panel. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced by reducing the amount of materials used for the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A).

Further, since the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be attached and detached, and the panel holder 1120 can be a common general-purpose part. It becomes. As a result, by mass-producing the panel holder 1120, the cost of the panel holder 1120 can be reduced, and by manufacturing the panel plate 1110 or the panel plate 1110A corresponding to each model, a new model or a model change can be made. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the elastic claw 1062 is locked to the magnetic sensor 1050 in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the accommodating portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060. Further, in a state where the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a, the elastic claw 1072a is locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 so as to pass through the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072. The magnetic sensor 1050 can be provided on the game board 5. At this time, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 or the like attracts the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055. It is possible to prevent the magnetism from being stored, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055 at an early stage, and it is possible to notify fraudulent activity by notifying the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to discourage an act and provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, as described above, the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 made of a non-magnetic material prevent the magnetic field lines from being attracted from the magnet 1055 to prevent the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a by the number of magnetic sensors 1050, which is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and the number of magnetic sensors 1050 can be reduced as compared with the conventional one. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, by elastically deforming the elastic claw 1062 of the accommodating portion 1061 and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to or detached from the holding member 1060 or the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached by the elastic claw 1062 or the elastic claw 1072a without using a metal screw made of a magnetic material, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. This time and effort can be facilitated, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the holding member 1071 is provided with a plurality of locking portions 1071a in advance, and the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 is locked to the locking portion 1071a at an appropriate position, whereby the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided. Can be provided at an arbitrary position or the position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or expanded, the pachinko machine 1 capable of easily responding to a design change or a model change while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. be able to.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is urged into the accommodating portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, it is possible to suppress the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the urging by the protrusion 1063. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 is disconnected or poor contact occurs, and the magnetic sensor 1050 can be operated reliably.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by the holding member 1050, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor substrate 1052 is passed through the transparent sensor case 1053. The mounted sensor body 1051 can be shown to the player. At this time, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051 having a different color (for example, black) can be made to stand out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the magnetic sensor 1050 is not a dummy but a real one, and it is illegal for a person who tries to cheat using the magnet 1055 by seeing the magnetic sensor 1050. It is possible to hesitate to execute the act, enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts, and reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, even if the sensor body 1051 can be seen through the transparent sensor case 1053, an ordinary player does not pay much attention to the existence of the magnetic sensor 1050, and therefore does not care. On the other hand, since a person who intends to commit a fraudulent act gazes at the inside of the game area 5a, the contrast between the white sensor substrate 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 more visible, which is good. I can see it. Therefore, by noticing the existence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to hesitate to execute a fraudulent act using a magnet, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power.

Further, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor board 1052 can be made inconspicuous, and the sensor board 1052 is a decorative board on which the LED is mounted. Can be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it is not a concern for a normal player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming region 5a from being unattractive.

Further, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, it is possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the sensor body 1051 is damaged, so that the time and effort required for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is provided on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material, the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072, etc., the holding member 1060 and the holding member 1071 are provided on the game board 5. When mounting using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the holding member 1060 or the holding member 1071 to be mounted on the game board 5 is located at a position away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or in the game area 5a. It can be installed at a position outside the magnetic detection range. As a result, the influence of magnetic materials such as screws can be reduced as much as possible, so that the magnetic sensor 1050 can reliably detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and the magnet 1055 can be used for fraudulent activities. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent power.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back front effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5, an LED 3176 for displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 by light emission is mounted. In front of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, and the back front lower left outer in the back front lower effect unit 3160. Decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc. The left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided. By providing the LED 3176 (the left decorative substrate 3174 under the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 under the light guide plate), the LED 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the LED 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110. In such a state, the LED 3176 emits light from the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 or the like emits light to illuminate the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like. Then, the light from the LED 3176 is the light reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, whereas the light from the LED such as the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 is the light directly radiated forward. It is possible to make the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc., which is light emitting and decorated, shine brighter than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. Can be made to. Then, since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, which is light-emittingly displayed, extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly upward position) close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like which are light-emittingly decorated. Since the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be strongly misunderstood by the player as if it is emitted and displayed by using the light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 or the like which is light emitting and decorated as a light source. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3110, which has never been seen in the pachinko machines up to the above, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174, the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate Since the light from the LED mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3175 can illuminate the light guide plate 3110 and prevent the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player, the second pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be prevented. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of light emission such as 3112 and surely exerting the above-mentioned effect.

Further, since the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 having translucency is provided in front of the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate are provided. When the LED mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3175 is made to emit light, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like can be made to emit light and be decorated. It is also possible to show the player the effect of the light emitting decoration such as the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored by the various effects.

Further, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is made to emit light and the LEDs mounted on the light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175 are made to emit light, as described above, the light guide plate lower left The LED mounted on the decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate illuminates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like to illuminate the player's interest. The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from the upper predetermined position close to the back front lower middle decoration body 3161 attracts the player's attention to the back front lower middle decoration body. It can be directed from 3161 or the like via the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to the upper end where the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the back-rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that moves up and down in the back-rear upper effect unit 3200, and the like are provided at the upper end extending from the second pattern 3112. , The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not a further effect (effect by the effect image, movable effect, etc.) is executed, and the player can enjoy it. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a plurality of line groups 3114 in which five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position are set, and each line 3113 emits light independently. Since it is possible to display and LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided so as to correspond to each line 3113, the first LED 3176a to the fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 are made to emit light in order to emit light. The displayed line 3113 can be changed to show a pseudo animation. Since the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 and the like are provided at the lower positions close to the lower end positions (predetermined positions) of the plurality of lines 3113, the back surface where the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is light-emitting decorated. Since the light from the front lower middle decoration body 3161 etc. can be made to appear to be moving as a light source, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and make him think that there is something good. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery result (special lottery result) of the special lottery is drawn by the establishment of the start condition by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, after the plurality of LEDs 1401 of the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are lit and blinked to change and display the special symbol, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol suggesting a special lottery result is displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b turned on and off. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b is partially radiated forward by the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414. Is radiated only to one eye of the player, and at least a part of the rest is radiated only to the other eye of the player. As a result, the light from all the LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, so that it is possible to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of LEDs 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b in a good state. The special symbol of the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be clearly visually recognized, and the display function of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be exhibited as well.

Then, when a plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b (function display unit 1400A and function display unit 1400B) are photographed by a digital camera or a mobile phone camera, as described above, all of them are viewed with both eyes of the player. Since the light from the LED 1401 and the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, only one of both eyes can be photographed by the monocular camera, and all the LED 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b emit light. It can be difficult to shoot accurately. Therefore, since it is not possible to accurately capture the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b, a special symbol in which an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player is displayed is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether or not it is present, and it is possible to entertain the production suggesting the lottery result of the special lottery to the end and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the function display unit 1400A, a part of the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is tilted in the front-rear direction toward the position of one eye of the player, and the rest is tilted in the other eye of the player. It is designed to be tilted in the front-back direction toward the position and straight in the front-back direction. As a result, in addition to the same effects as described above, the inclination of the display hole 1405a allows players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the light from all the LEDs 1401 in good condition. Since it can be made difficult, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of being looked into by other players. You can enjoy the game without hesitation.

Further, in the function display unit 1400B, the plurality of left LEDs 1411a mounted on the function display board 1411 and the plurality of right LEDs 1411b are separated from each other by a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) in the left-right direction, and then in front of them. Since the reflector front 1414 having a plurality of display holes 1414a is provided in the above, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained, and since each display hole 1414a is directed straight in the front-rear direction, a plurality of displays are displayed. Die-cutting when molding the hole 1414a becomes easy, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the function display unit 1400C, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 can be seen from the player side through the transparent light guide plate 1423, so that the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be played in a good state. Can be shown to others. At this time, if invisible light is emitted from the invisible light LED 1424a to the side surface of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side surface is radiated from the light guide plate 1423 to the player side in front of the light guide plate 1423. Since the player cannot see the emitted invisible light, the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, and the display function by the plurality of LEDs 1421a can be exhibited as well. Then, when an image is taken from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is being emitted, the invisible light radiated from the light guide plate 1423 to the front is captured depending on the model of the digital camera or the like. By shining brightly, it becomes difficult to capture the light from the plurality of LEDs 1421a provided behind, and it is possible to make it difficult to determine the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs 1421a. It can be embodied.

Further, in the function display unit 1400 or the like, the main control board 1310 may make the plurality of LEDs blink at a speed at which the player can recognize that the special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the plurality of LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are blinked at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310, the player seems to be lit, so that the display of the special symbol by the plurality of LEDs is clarified. It can be shown, and the display function of a plurality of LEDs can be fully exhibited. Then, when the LED blinking at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 is photographed with a digital camera or the like, the LED appears to be lit but turned off depending on the shutter speed. Even if a plurality of LEDs that appear to be in the state) are photographed, the LEDs may be turned on or off depending on the timing of releasing the shutter, making it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs. , The pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied. The predetermined speed at which the LED is blinked by the main control board 1310 is preferably in the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz, and if the blinking speed is slower than this, the LED does not appear to be lit and the special symbol fluctuates. This is because if the blinking speed is faster than this, the image will be in the lit state when the image is taken.

Further, a high-brightness LED capable of irradiating a light having a higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400 or the like in front of the function display unit 1400 or the like may be provided. As a result, when a high-brightness LED provided close to the function display unit 1400 or the like is made to emit light, the dynamic range in which the player (human) feels the brightness of the player (human), although the high-brightness LED from the LED makes the person feel dazzling. Because the light is dazzling, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400 etc. can be seen, so that the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 etc. can be recognized, and the function display unit 1400 etc. The display function can be exhibited as well. Then, when the function display unit 1400 or the like is photographed with a digital camera or the like while the high-brightness LED is emitting light, the dynamic range for the brightness of the digital camera or the like is narrower than that of a human being, so that the light from the high-brightness LED causes halation. Is generated, and the vicinity of the LED is overexposed, so that a part of the function display unit 1400 or the like cannot be captured. Therefore, it is possible to unclear the light emitting state of a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 or the like, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that has the same effect as described above.

Further, the characteristic action and effect of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1805, the decorative body 1806, the decorative body 1807L and the decorative body 1807R, the decorative body 1808, the decorative body 1809, and the gate seal 2811 in the present embodiment are used as the decorative body, and the glue surface 1804b in the present embodiment is used as the decorative body. On the glue surface, the first member 1823, the first member 1824, the first member 1825, the first member left 1826L and the first member right 1826R, the first member 1827, the first member 1828, and the gate body 2810 The flat plate portion 1823a, the flat plate portion 1824a, the flat plate portion 1825a, the flat plate portion 1826a, the flat plate portion 1827a, the flat plate portion 1828a, and the front plate portion 2810a correspond to the flat plate portion, respectively, as the pedestal member. Further, the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1824b, the mounting recess 1825b, the mounting recess 1826b, the mounting recess 1827b, the mounting recess 1828b, and the sticking recess 2810b in the present embodiment are the mounting recesses, and the separation hole 1823c and the separation hole 1827c in the present embodiment. Separation holes 1828c and separation holes 2810d are used in the separation holes, and the erroneous sticking prevention section 1823e, erroneous sticking prevention section 1824c, erroneous sticking prevention section 1825c, erroneous sticking prevention section 1826c, erroneous sticking prevention section 1827d, and erroneous sticking prevention section 1828d and the erroneous sticking prevention section 2810c correspond to the erroneous sticking prevention section, respectively. Further, the contact surface of the first member 1823, the contact surface of the first member 1824, the contact surface of the first member 1825, the contact surface of the decorative body left 1807L and the contact surface of the decorative body right 1807R, and the contact surface of the first member 1827 in the present embodiment. , The contact surface of the first member 1828 and the contact surface of the gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion. From here to paragraph [1898], the decorative body is the decorative body 1804, the pedestal member is the first member 1823, the flat plate portion is the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess is the mounting recess 1823b, and the separation hole is the separation hole 1823c. Other configurations (members) corresponding to the present invention are described as representatives, such as the erroneous sticking prevention part 1823e and the positioning part as the contact surface of the first member 1823 (wrong sticking prevention part 1823e). Since the same effects are obtained with respect to the above, the description thereof is omitted here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is used as a contact surface (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823 on the first member 1823. Therefore, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 are pressed against the peripheral wall portion of the mounting recess 1823b. The decorative body 1804 can be positioned with respect to the first member 1823 by abutting the surface (erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e) and sticking the decorative body 1804. Can be facilitated, and the decorative body 1804 can be accurately attached to the proper position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the fact that the decorative body 1804 is attached to the first member 1823 in a tilted or misaligned state due to the contact surface of the first member 1823 (erroneous attachment prevention portion 1823e). In addition, since it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the first member 1823, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be surely exhibited, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved to reduce the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 can be accurately attached to the regular position by the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misattachment prevention portion 1823e), the decorative body 1804 can be easily attached to the correct position, and the decoration can be made. It is possible to reduce the failure of sticking the body 1804 and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, the orientation of the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to be mistaken, and the decorative body 1804 is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct direction to be attached to the decorative body 1804. The decorative effect of 1804 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b in the first member 1823 is provided, if the decorative body 1804 is pasted in the wrong direction, the erroneous sticking prevention portion 1823e is decorated. Since the body 1804 is in a rolled-up state, it is possible to recognize that the decorative body 1804 is attached in the wrong direction, and the decorative body 1804 is reattached in the correct direction to ensure the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804. Can be demonstrated.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c penetrating the flat plate portion 1823a is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 of the first member 1823 is attached, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823. Then, when the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, a part of the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 to the front side against the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804 b, and the decorative body 1804 By pulling the portion, it can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the decorative body 1804 having a predetermined decoration is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a in the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 is used. The appearance of the first member 1823 can be improved, and the decorative body 1804 can be supported by the first member 1823. Further, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the mounting recess 1823a in the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 is attached. Since the peripheral portion of 1823b surrounds the periphery of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be complemented by being bordered by the portion, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 1804 can be easily exerted. Therefore, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a is composed of a band-shaped portion on the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a strip-shaped portion diagonally crossing the strip-shaped portion. Since it is provided only in a specific part and not provided on the entire back surface, the sticking strength is weaker than in the past. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed by the tip thereof, the first member resists the adhesive force of the glue surface 1804b even with a relatively weak force. The decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of 1823, and even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, the decorative body 1804 can be removed without being torn in the middle. Can be improved.

Further, from the above, when the decorative body 1804 cannot be correctly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, it is separated from the back side of the first member 1823. By passing a rod-shaped member through the hole 1823c and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip thereof, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a, so that the decorative body 1804 can be easily reattached. .. Further, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823, and the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side by the tip thereof. Since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the above, the replacement work of the decorative body 1804 due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by using the separation hole 1823c, it is easy to perform the sorting work for each material for the component parts of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided at a position where it does not come into contact with the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the glue surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, by providing the glue surface 1804b only on a part (specific part) of the decorative body 1804, the sticking strength is lowered as compared with the conventional case, but the entire glue surface 1804b is stuck on the flat plate portion 1823a. It is possible to prevent the sticking strength from being lowered more than necessary due to the separation hole 1823c being applied to the glue surface 1804b, and the sticking strength of the decorative body 1804 is sufficiently maintained and stuck to the flat plate portion 1823a in a good state. Can be attached.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the peripheral band frame-shaped portion and the band-shaped portion (diagonal portion) diagonally crossing the peripheral band frame-shaped portion, the decorative body is formed by the band frame-shaped portion of the glue surface 1804b. Since the peripheral edge of 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be prevented from rising from the flat plate portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be made difficult to peel off starting from the peripheral edge. Further, since the portion near the center of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a by the strip-shaped portion that diagonally crosses the glue surface 1804b, the first member is affected by changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if the shrinkage difference between the 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large, it is possible to reduce the swelling and wrinkling of the decorative body 1804, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative body 1804 from deteriorating. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 can be surely exhibited, and the larger decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in a good state, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having high appeal.

Further, since the glue surface 1804b is provided on the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made translucent, and the back side of the first member 1823 is moved to the decorative body 1804 side. When a light source such as an LED that irradiates light is provided, the strip-shaped glue surface 1804b is located at a portion that does not interfere with the light from the light source, and is decorated by the diffusion or attenuation of the light by the glue surface 1804b. Since it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the body 1804 such as the light emitting decoration, the decorative body 1804 is light-emitting decorated in a good state, or the light source is visually recognized in a good state through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high effect of effect and display effect.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be obscured or hidden from the front side by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, and it is difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the separation hole 1823c. be able to.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 to press the back surface of the decorative body 1804. Then, since the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804, the marginal side is easily lifted from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact, and the decorative body is attached. The 1804 can be made easier to remove.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided at a portion close to the peripheral edge of the decoration body 1804, when the decoration body 1804 is pressed by the rod-shaped member from the back side of the first member 1823 via the separation hole 1823c, as described above. In addition, since the edge side of the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact with the decorative body 1804, by grasping and pulling the raised portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 is lifted from the flat plate portion 1823a. It can be easily removed by turning it around.

Further, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a size capable of contacting a circle having a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm, in addition to the same effects as described above, an upper limit of the size of the separation hole 1823c is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the size of the glue surface in the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to maintain the desired sticking strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Further, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, the decorative body 1804 is pasted using the boundary portion between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide. By attaching the decorative body 1804, it is possible to easily attach the decorative body 1804 to the correct position, and it is possible to reduce the failure of attaching the decorative body 1804 and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, it is like a flat-blade driver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b in order to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side. Even if an attempt is made to insert a new tool, the insertion of the tool is hindered by the peripheral wall portion of the recessed mounting recess 1823b, but the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is formed in the portion covered by the decorative body 1804. Since the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decoration body 1804 is attached, the rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side as described above, and the decoration body 1804 is provided. By pressing the surface toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the conventional technique (pachinko machine), since the hole for peeling the seal penetrates to the rear side of the pachinko machine (game board), a linear tool such as a piano wire is passed through the hole. It is possible to reach the passage, signal line, etc. of the game ball B, and there is a problem that fraudulent acts are likely to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 181) capable of closing the separation hole 1823c on the back side of the first member 1823. As a result, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member, so that the hole passes to the opposite side of the game board like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, when the second member (see the second member 1841, the second member 1842, etc. in FIG. 181) for closing the separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 as described above, the illegal tool is used from the front side. Even if the tool is inserted into the separation hole 1823c through the decorative body 1804, the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the second member, and the insertion (invasion) of the second member to the outside (inside the game board 5) is blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed, and the illegal tool is the decorative body 1804. Since a trace remains on the decorative body 1804 by penetrating the machine, it is possible to hesitate to execute the fraudulent activity, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against the fraudulent activity.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is played in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided in the substrate unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4. When the game ball B released from the board 5 is clogged, the security cover 714 that closes the opening 711b of the front base 711 is opened, and a minus from the notch 713q above the opening 711b among the plurality of notches 713q. By inserting a rod-shaped tool such as a driver and poking the jammed game ball B, the game ball B can be broken and the jam can be easily cleared. After that, by closing the elimination port 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the elimination port 711b and the notch 713q. Can be blocked by the security cover 714. If an unauthorized tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the first ball path 701. And, in order to extend from the entrance of the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the tip of the illegal tool is brought into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. Even if it is attempted to move, if it comes into contact with any of the plurality of obstructive ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the obstruction rib 713o obstructs the movement of the illegal tool. can do. In this way, the crime prevention cover 714 and the plurality of obstructive ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and have a high deterrent against fraudulent acts. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the base unit 710 is transparently formed, when the game ball B is clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the place where the ball clogging occurs just by looking from the outside. Can be easily recognized, the elimination work can be facilitated, and the maintenance burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Further, in the base unit 710, since the discharge passage for discharging the game ball B is composed of the independent first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short time. When the game balls B are played, they can be distributed to the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and discharged, so that the game balls B are often distributed to one first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. It is possible to reduce the concentration of the game balls B, prevent the ball from being easily clogged due to the concentration of the game balls B, and many game balls released from the game board 5. B can be quickly discharged to the island equipment side (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) of the game hall.

Further, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 and the second ball. Since the number of game balls B discharged from the path 702 can be counted, the number of the game balls B counted in the upstream game board 5 can be compared with the game board 5, the first ball path 701, and the first ball. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity on the two-ball route 702, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Further, since the discharge passage is composed of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 that are independent in the front-rear direction, the game ball B (safe) received in the winning opening to which the privilege is given in the game board 5. By releasing the ball) and the game ball B (out ball) that was not accepted in the winning opening to a position different in the front-rear direction, the game ball B received in the winning opening and the winning opening The unaccepted game ball B can be discharged by circulating the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, which are different from each other. Since it is provided with a first ball sensor 703 and a second ball sensor 704 that can detect one game ball B circulating in each of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the game board Outside of 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) accepted in the winning opening and the number of game balls B (out balls) not accepted in the winning opening can be counted, so that the game board can be counted. By comparing with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted in 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity against the winning opening of the game board 5, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities.

Further, since the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided in the base unit 710 (ball path member 713), the game is played. It is not necessary to provide a sensor, an electronic circuit, or the like for counting the number of game balls B discharged (discharged) to the outside on the board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is attached to the front base 711 so that the release port 711b can be rotated by the hinge, even if the release port 711b is opened by the security cover 714, the security cover 714 is provided by the hinge shaft of the hinge rotation. It is in a state of being attached to the front base 711. Therefore, even if the security cover 714 is opened in order to clear the clogging of the game ball B on the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the security cover 714 from being lost.

Further, after the security cover 714 is provided on the lower surface of the base unit 710, the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the hinge shaft of the security cover 714 is left and right on the front end side of the security cover 714. Since it is provided so as to extend to the right (horizontal direction), the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall is used to clear the clogging of the game ball B on the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. After opening the main body frame 4 forward with respect to 2, the security cover 714 is opened and a predetermined tool is inserted into the clearing port 711b to clear the ball clogging. After that, after closing the security cover 714, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. At this time, if the security cover 714 is open, the tip of the security cover 714 is the outer frame 2 (contact fear). Since the main body frame 4 cannot be closed in contact with the object), it is possible to notice that the security cover 714 has been forgotten to be closed, and the security cover 714 can be closed to securely close the elimination port 711b. Further, even if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is opened. As a result, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction, so that the main body frame 4 does not open, the main body frame 4 can be opened satisfactorily, and the security cover 714 and the like are damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q, dust and dirt that has entered the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 , Dust adhering to the game ball B can be discharged below the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 through the notch 713q, and the dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball clogging of the game ball B due to dust, and it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since a part of the plurality of notches 713q is also used as a tool insertion slot for inserting a tool for eliminating ball clogging, it is not necessary to separately provide a tool insertion slot, and the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration. Can be simplified, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the base unit 710, since the dust that has fallen through the notch 713q does not come into contact with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball are prevented from being caught by the dust. It is possible to prevent the sensor 704 from having a problem, and it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first member (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the gate 2003, etc.) forming the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game ball B is distributed in the game board 5 is formed. Front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second member 1841, second The attachment part (spec seal affixed) of the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, the flat plate portion 1821a, the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first member with the member 1842, etc. Decorative bodies (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) in which predetermined decorations are applied to the portion 1021, the sticking recess 2531a, the sticking recess 2810b, the mounting recess 1821b, the mounting recess 1822b, etc. Since the decorative body 1801, the decorative body 1802, the decorative body 1803, etc.) are in contact with each other, the appearance of the first member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the contacting portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed from one surface of the flat plate portion, when the decorative body is attached to the contacting portion, the contacting portion in the flat plate portion of the first member Since the surrounding part of the slingshot surrounds the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine can be bordered by the part to make the pachinko machine stand out, making it easier to exert the decorative effect of the pachinko machine. The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, a contacting portion (spec sticker affixing portion 1021, spec seal sticking portion 1021, etc.) to which a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached. The sticking recess 2531a, the sticking recess 2810b, the mounting recess 1821b, the mounting recess 1822b, etc.) are formed into a flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Since it is dented from the inside, it is possible to easily attach the decorative body to the correct position by using the boundary between the flat plate portion and the contacting portion as a guide to attach the decorative body to the decorative body. It is possible to reduce the failure of the pachinko machine 1 and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front constituent member 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, etc.) in the first member (front component 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) Decorative fittings (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) recessed from the flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.) Since the body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached, the decorative body is removed from one side. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver between the decorative body and the contact portion, the insertion of the tool is hindered by the wall portion on the periphery of the recessed contact portion. On the other hand, separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) of the first member are provided at a portion where one side is closed by the decorative body. Therefore, a separation hole is provided in the contacting portion to which the decorative body is attached. Therefore, by inserting the rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative body to one side, the decorative body is attached. The contact with the portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the recessed contact portion. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, if it cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion of the first member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is attached by the tip thereof. By pressing from the other side, the contact with the flat plate portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first member, and the decorative body can be reattached. .. Further, with the first member and the second member separated, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the other side of the first member, and the decorative body is pressed from the other side by the tip thereof, whereby the flat plate of the first member is formed. Since the contact with the portion can be easily released, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the first member and the second member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the flat plate portion by using the separation hole, so that the components of the pachinko machine 1 can be easily removed. It is possible to facilitate the sorting work for each material, and it is possible to reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front constituent member 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member (front constituent member 1000, front member 2531, gate body 2810, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.). Since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are provided on the front surface of the front member 2531, the front plate portion 2810a, etc.), the flat plate portion is decorated. (Spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) To make the separation hole difficult to see or hide from one side. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole, make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and make it difficult to plan fraudulent acts through the separation hole. ..

Then, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the first member (pre-component member 1000, first member 1000, first member) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached is attached. Separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c) from the other side of the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of one member 1821, first member 1822, etc. , Etc.) so as to extend the extension portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) to the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). , Because the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole forms a closed space blocked from the outside by the extending portion and the one side surface of the second member. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension part or the other side of the second member, and also to penetrate a hole that passes to the opposite side like a conventional pachinko machine. Instead, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) is made a closed space by the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.). Even if the illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) from one side, the tip of the illegal tool is blocked from the outside. It will be inserted into the closed space, and the extension part (insertion pin 1022, boss part 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) of the first member (front component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) and the first member Since the two members can block the insertion (invasion) into the passage portion (game area 5a, etc.) side or the pachinko machine 1, the illegal tool can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole. Intrusion can be prevented, fraudulent activity can be prevented from being performed through separation holes and passages, and fraudulent tools can penetrate the decorative body, leaving traces on the decorative body. It is possible to hesitate to execute the pachinko machine 1 and provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to fraudulent activities.

Further, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned with each other, so that the assembly can be performed. This time and effort can be facilitated, and an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Further, when the positioning protrusion 1841b is inserted into the separation hole 1821d and the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned with each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b. The 1821d itself can be the closed space described above, and the pachinko machine 1 having the same effects as described above can be provided.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a passage member having a passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole of gate sensor 2801, etc.) through which the game ball B flows (the game area 5a, the lower right guide passage 2530, the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) Of the front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) provided on the front side of the game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decoration sticker 2532, gate seal) with predetermined decorations on the front surface to be decorated (spec sticker sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) Since 2811, etc.) are attached, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by decorating the decorative body. Further, since the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed rearward from the depth in the front-rear direction of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the decorated portion in the front member becomes Since the surrounding part protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body, the decorative body can be complemented by being bordered by the portion protruding forward of the front member, and the decorative effect of the decorative body decoration can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making it easier to exert.

In addition, the decorated part (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) is attached is rearward. Since it is recessed, the decorative body is guided by the protruding periphery of the decorated portion in the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.). By contacting the pachinko machine, it is possible to easily attach the decorative body to the correct position, reduce the failure of the decorative body to be attached, and suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorated parts (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess) of the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) Since 2810b, etc.) is recessed rearward, the decorative body and the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are in contact with the decorated portion. Since the contact surface with the decorative portion is located at a recessed position, even if the decorative body attached to the decorated portion is to be removed, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front side, and it takes time and effort to remove the decorative body. On the other hand, since the decorated portion is provided with the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), the decorative body is pressed forward from the rear of the front member through the separation hole through the rod-shaped member. As a result, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, at the time of manufacturing, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body is pressed from the rear by the tip thereof. By doing so, the contact with the decorated portion can be easily released, so that the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion, and the decorative body can be reattached.

Further, the front member (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center accessory 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) are used. In the separated state, a rod-shaped member is passed through the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532) is provided by the tip thereof. , Gate seal 2811, etc.) from behind, the contact with the decorated part (spec seal sticking part 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) can be easily released. The decorative body can be easily removed from the decorative portion, and the replacement work of the decorative body due to the model change can be facilitated. Further, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated from each other, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion by using the separation hole. It is possible to facilitate each sorting operation and reduce the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the decorated portion (spec seal sticking portion 1021, sticking recess 2531a, sticking recess 2810b, etc.) is provided with a separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.), the decorated portion is provided. By attaching a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the separation hole can be obscured or hidden from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance due to the separation hole is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the separation hole, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act through the separation hole.

Then, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front member (front component 1000, center role) to which the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) is attached is attached. Separation holes (separation) are provided by passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) assembled on the rear side of the front member 2531 of the object 2500, the gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.). Hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear, and unlike conventional pachinko machines, the hole that passes to the rear side is not penetrated. It is possible to prevent such a linear fraudulent tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, since the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), an illegal tool is used. Is inserted into the separation hole through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from the front, but the passage member allows further rearward insertion (invasion). Since it can be prevented, unauthorized tools cannot enter the passage from the front through the separation hole (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, detection hole of gate sensor 2801 (gate 2003), etc.). It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities, and it is possible to hesitate to commit fraudulent activities because the fraudulent tools pierce the decorations and leave traces on the decorations. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent force against.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is a combination of a pachinko machine or a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied to the machine, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

Further, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1822c, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, separation hole 1823c, separation hole 1827c, separation hole 1828c, etc. ), But it is not limited to this, and may be slit-shaped or notched-shaped.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5A Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110A Panel board (front member)
1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1121 Throughout 3000 Back unit 3100 Back front production unit 3120 Back front left decoration unit (decoration unit)
3121 Back front left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3122 Back front upper left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3123 Back front left sub decoration part (decoration part)
3124 Back front left first decorative body (decorative body)
3124a Separation decoration part (light-shielding part)
3124b Penetration decoration part 3124c Front left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3124d 1st back left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3124e 1st upper left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3124f 1st left sub decoration part (decoration part)
3125 Back front left second decorative body (decorative body)
3125c Separation decoration part (light-shielding part)
3125d 2nd back left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3125e 2nd upper left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3125f 2nd left sub decoration part (decoration part)
3126 Back front left Third decorative body (decorative body)
3126c Separation decoration part (light-shielding part)
3126d 3rd back left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3126e Third upper left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3126f Third left sub decoration part (decoration part)
3127 Back front left decorative body base (decorative body)
3127d Base upper left logo decoration part (decoration part)
3128 Back front left decorative board 3128a First lower LED (light emitting means)
3128b First upper LED (light emitting means)
3128c Second lower LED (light emitting means)
3128d Second upper LED (light emitting means)
3128e Third lower LED (light emitting means)
3128f Third upper LED (light emitting means)
3128h LED under the base (light emitting means)
LED on 3128i base (light emitting means)
3129 Back front upper left decorative board 3130 Back front left lower decorative board 3130a First LED (light emitting means)
3130b Second LED (light emitting means)
3130c Third LED (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

A decorative body with a predetermined decoration and
A front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front and a through hole penetrating the decorated portion in the front-rear direction.
It is provided on the back surface side of the decorated portion, and includes a passage member having a passage portion through which a game ball can be distributed.
The front member has a rear-extending portion that forms the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached slightly lower than the surroundings and further extends rearward.
Wherein the decorative portion has a substantially thin plate, said through hole, said at a site which is distinct from the rearward extending portion, and extends through the substantially the object decorative portion is a thin plate shape of the front member,
The passage member is provided so as to cover the hole portion of the through hole on the front side of the extending end of the rear extending portion , and abuts on the back surface side of the decorated portion having a substantially thin plate shape. gaming machine characterized in that is.

Images